Operating Instructions
DVD Recorder
Model No. DMR-EX75
ing
ted
r
t
e
DMR-EX85
sta
G
ing
w
Vie
The illustration shows DMR-EX75.
g
n
i
d
r
o
c
Re
ck
a
b
g
n
i
ay
l
P
This DVD recorder is for viewing and recording free to
view channels only, not pay TV or encrypted channels.
Region number supported by
g
n
Trademark of the DVB Digital Video Broadcasting
Project (1991 to 1996)
Declaration of Conformity No. 4237, 13th July 2006
(DMR-EX75)
Declaration of Conformity No. 4236, 13th July 2006
(DMR-EX85)
this unit
Region numbers are allocated to DVD
players and DVD-Video according to where
they are sold.
Edti
≥The region number of this unit is “4”.
≥The unit will play DVD-Video marked with
labels containing “4” or “ALL”.
Example:
g
n
i
2
3
4
ALL
opy
4
C
nt
s
ie
n
e
v
Dear customer
tion
c
Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum
performance and safety, please read these
instructions carefully.
C
fun
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this
product, please read the instructions completely.
Please keep this manual for future reference.
e
c
n
e
r
e
f
Re
RQT8388-L
GN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of contents
Getting started
Editing
HDD, disc and card information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Important notes for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Disc and card handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Included accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
The remote control information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Control reference guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
The unit’s display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Editing titles/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Editing titles/chapters and playing chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Title operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Creating, editing and playing playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Creating playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Editing and playing playlists/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Playlist operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Editing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Album and picture operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
STEP 1 Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Connecting with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface)
terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Control with HDMI (HDAVI Control TM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Delete Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Using the DELETE Navigator to delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Deleting titles or pictures during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and
TV aspect settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
STEP 3 Set up to match your television
and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
To enjoy progressive video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Copying
Copying titles or playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Copying a finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Copying MPEG2 moving pictures from an SD card . . . . . . . . . . 51
Viewing
Watching television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Select the channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Digital channel information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Copying still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Copying using the copying list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Copying all the still pictures on a card—Copy All Pictures . . . . . 53
Copying from a video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Recording
Recording television programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Disc Insertion/Ejection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
To specify a time to stop recording—One Touch Recording . . . 24
Recording settings for High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Using G-CODE system to make timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Manually programming timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
To cancel recording when recording has already begun . . . . . . 28
To release the unit from recording standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Check, change or delete a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Relief Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Convenient functions
HDD, disc and card management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Setting the protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Providing a name for a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete all titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Deleting all the contents of a disc or card—Format . . . . . . . . . . 56
Selecting the background style–Top Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first
–Auto-Play Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Enabling discs to be played on other equipment
–Finalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating Top Menu–Create Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
FUNCTIONS window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Common procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Summary of settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
TV System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Clock Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Playing back
Playing recorded video contents/
Playing play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Operations during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Playing DivX discs,
MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF) . . . . . . . . . .33
Regarding DivX discs,
MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Selecting file type to play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Playing DivX discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Playing MP3 discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Playing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Useful functions during still picture play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Using on-screen menus/Status message. . . . . . . . . . . 38
Using on-screen menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Reference
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back cover
RQT8388
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD, disc and card information
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play
Hard disk drive (HDD)
≥[DMR-EX75] 160 GB
DVD-RAM
≥4.7 GB/9.4 GB, 12 cm
Disc type
[DMR-EX85] 250 GB
≥2.8 GB, 8 cm
Logo
–
Indicated in these
instructions by
[HDD]
[RAM]
DVD Video Recording format
This is a recording method which allows you to record and edit television broadcasts and so on.
≥You can delete unwanted parts of a title, create playlists, etc.
Recording format
≥Digital broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” can be recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.
Data that can be recorded
and played
Video
Still pictures
Video
Still pictures
Re-writable§1
Y
Y
Play on other players§2
–
Only on DVD-RAM compatible players.
Compatible with high
speed recording§3
–
Up to 5X recording speed discs.
What you can do on this unit (Y: Can do, t: Cannot do)
Recording broadcasts that
allow one copy
Y
Y [CPRM (➡ 76) compatible discs only.]
Recording both M 1 and
M 2 for bilingual
Y
Y
broadcasts§4
Recording 16:9 aspect
picture§4
Y
Y
Y
Y
Creating and editing
playlists
DVD-R DL
(dual layer on single side)
You cannot directly record to a
DVD-R DL disc on this unit (➡ 8)
DVD-R
≥4.7 GB, 12 cm
≥1.4 GB, 8 cm
DVD-RW
≥4.7 GB, 12 cm
≥1.4 GB, 8 cm
Disc type
Logo
≥
[-R] before finalization
[-R]DL] before finalization
[-RW‹V›] before finalization
Indicated in these
instructions by
[DVD-V] after finalization
[DVD-V] after finalization
[DVD-V] after finalization
DVD-Video format
This recording method is the same as commercially available DVD-Video.
Recording format
≥Digital broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be recorded.
Data that can be recorded
and played
Video
Video
Video
Re-writable§1
t
t
Y
Only on DVD-R DL compatible
players after finalizing the disc
(➡ 57, 76).
Only after finalizing the disc
Play on other players§2
Only after finalizing the disc (➡ 57, 76).
(➡ 57, 76).
Compatible with high
speed recording§3
Up to 16X recording speed discs.
Up to 4X recording speed discs.
Up to 6X recording speed discs.
What you can do on this unit (Y: Can do, t: Cannot do)
Recording broadcasts that
allow one copy
t
t
t
Recording both M 1 and
t [Only one is recorded.(➡ 62, Bilingual
Audio Selection)]
t [Only one is recorded.(➡ 62,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]
t [Only one is recorded.(➡ 62,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]
M 2 for bilingual
broadcasts§4
Recording 16:9 aspect
picture§4
t (The picture is recorded in 4:3 aspect.) t (The picture is recorded in 4:3 t (The picture is recorded in 4:3
aspect.)
aspect.)
Creating and editing
playlists
t
t
t
RQT8388
(continued on the next page)
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play
(continued)
+R DL
+R§5
≥4.7 GB, 12 cm
(double layer on single side)
You cannot directly record to a
+R DL disc on this unit (➡ 8)
Disc type
Logo
+RW
≥
–
–
–
ion
[+R] before finalization
[DVD-V] after finalization
[+R]DL] before finalization
[DVD-V] after finalization
Indicated in these
instructions by
[+RW]
rmat
o
+VR (+R/+RW Video Recording) format
inf
This is a method for recording moving pictures to +R/+RW discs.
You can playback such discs recorded in this method in a similar way
as contents recorded in the DVD-Video format.
d
r
Recording format
a
≥Digital broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be recorded.
≥After finalizing the disc or creating the top menu, you can play the disc on DVD players and other equipment.
andc
c
Data that can be recorded
and played
Video
Video
Video
,dis
Re-writable§1
t
t
Y
Play on other players§2
Only on +R DL compatible players
after finalizing the disc (➡ 57, 76).
Only after finalizing the disc (➡ 57, 76).
Only on +RW compatible players.
HD
Compatible with high
speed recording§3
Up to 16X recording speed discs.
Up to 2.4X recording speed discs. Up to 4X recording speed discs.§6
What you can do on this unit (Y: Can do, t: Cannot do)
Recording broadcasts that
allow one copy
t
t
t
Recording both M 1 and
t [Only one is recorded.(➡ 62,
M 2 for bilingual
t [Only one is recorded.(➡ 62,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]
t [Only one is recorded.(➡ 62,
Bilingual Audio Selection)]
Bilingual Audio Selection)]
broadcasts§4
Recording 16:9 aspect
picture§4
t (The picture is recorded in 4:3
t (The picture is recorded in 4:3
t (The picture is recorded in 4:3
aspect.)
aspect.)
aspect.)
Creating and editing playlists
t
t
t
§1
The amount of the recordable disc space doesn’t increase even if the programme is deleted when you use one time recording disc.
[RAM] Can be played on Panasonic DVD Recorders and DVD-RAM compatible DVD players.
If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible equipment.
The high speed recording discs listed here are compatible with this unit. However, this is not the copy speed.
For further information (➡ 8, Important notes for recording)
+R discs recorded with this unit and +R discs recorded with another Panasonic DVD Recorder may be incompatible. However, discs that are
finalized are compatible and can be played.
You can play 8X recording speed discs recorded on another equipment.
§2
§3
§4
§5
§6
≥We recommend using Panasonic discs and cards. We also recommend using DVD-RAM discs with cartridges to protect them from scratches
and dirt.
≥You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the recording.
≥You cannot record programmes that allow “One time only recording” to CPRM compatible DVD-R and DVD-RW on this unit.You can record other
programmes as DVD-Video format.
≥This unit cannot record to discs containing both PAL and NTSC signals. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)
Play of discs recorded with both PAL and NTSC on another unit is not guaranteed.
[Note]
When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, the restrictions on secondary audio recording etc. are also applied to DVD-RAM. Turn this setting
“Off” if high speed copy to DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme (➡ 24).
Finalize
A process that makes play of a recorded disc possible on equipment that can play such media. After finalizing, the disc becomes play-only and
you can no longer record or edit. (➡ 57)
Formatting
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM recordable on recording equipment. (➡ 56)
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL
(Double Layer, single-sided) discs have two writable
layers on one side. If there is not enough space on the
first layer to record a programme, the balance is
recorded on the second layer. When playing a title
When switching layers:
Video and audio may momentarily cut
recorded on both layers, the unit automatically
switches between layers and plays the title in the same
way as a normal programme. However, video and
audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is
switching layers.
Second recordable layer
The available
space
(Inner
section of the
disc)
(Outersection
of the disc)
First recordable layer
DVD-R DL
+R DL
Title 1
Title 2
Playback direction
RQT8388
∫ Recording modes and approximate recording times ➡ 23
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD, disc and card information
Play-only discs (12 cm/8 cm)
Disc type
DVD-Video
DVD-Audio
DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format)
Logo
Indicated in
these
[DVD-V]
[DVD-A]
[-RW‹VR›]
instructions by
Instructions
High quality movie and music discs
High fidelity music
discs
DVD-RW recorded on another DVD Recorder
≥
You can play programmes that allow “One time only recording”
≥Played on this unit
if they have been recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.
≥By formatting (➡ 56) the disc, you can record to it in DVD-
Video format and play it on this unit.
in 2 channels.
≥It may be necessary to finalize the disc on the equipment
used for recording.
.
Disc type
Logo
DVD-R
CD
Video CD
–
Indicated in
these
DivX
[CD]
DivX, MP3, JPEG/TIFF
[VCD]
instructions by
Instructions
≥DVD-R§ with video recorded in
DivX
≥CD-R and CD-RW§ with
video recorded in DivX
≥CD-R and CD-RW§ with
music recorded in MP3
≥CD-R and CD-RW§ with still
pictures recorded in JPEG
and TIFF
Recorded audio and music
(including CD-R/RW§)
Recorded music and video
(including CD-R/RW§)
§ Close the session after recording. Play may be impossible on some discs due to the condition of the recording.
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
≥Operation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.
Regarding DVD-Audio
Some multi-channel DVD-Audio will prevent down-mixing (➡ 76) of all or part of their contents if this is the manufacturer’s intention. Tracks that
are prevented from being down-mixed will not play properly on this unit (e.g. audio is played from the front two channels only). Refer to the
disc’s jacket for more information.
Discs that cannot be played
≥2.6 and 5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm
Types of disc or title recorded on HDD
for the type of connected TV
When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a
title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table.
(Y: Possible to view, t: Impossible to view)
≥3.95 and 4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring
≥DVD-R recorded in DVD Video Recording format
≥
DVD-R (DVD-Video format), DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL recorded on another unit and not finalized (
➡
76).
≥DVD-Video with a region number other than “4” or “ALL”
Disc/Titles
recorded on HDD
≥Blu-ray
TV type
Yes/No
≥DVD-ROM, +R (8 cm), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD,
SVCD, SACD, MV-Disc, PD, etc.
PAL
NTSC
PAL
Y
Multi-system TV
Y§1
t
Y§2
NTSC TV
PAL TV
NTSC
PAL
Y
Y§3 (PAL60)
NTSC
§1
If you select “NTSC” in “TV System” (➡ 67), the picture may be
clearer.
Select “NTSC” in “TV System” (➡ 67).
If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60 signals
the picture will not be shown correctly.
§2
§3
≥When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you
match the “TV System” setting to the title (➡ 67).
RQT8388
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cards you can use on this unit
Type
SD Memory Card
miniSD Card§
MultiMediaCard
Indicated in these instructions
by
[SD]
ion
Data that can be recorded and
played
Still pictures
Video (MPEG2)
rmat
o
inf
Instructions
You can insert directly into the SD card slot.
§ A miniSD card adaptor included with the miniSD card is necessary.
d
r
a
≥You can play and copy still pictures taken on a digital camera etc. (➡ 36, 52).
≥You can set the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) for automatic printing on your home printer or at a
photo developing store (➡ 45, 76).
andc
≥MPEG2 moving pictures shot with a Panasonic SD Video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or
c
DVD-RAM. (➡ 51)
≥MPEG2 moving pictures cannot be played directly from the SD card.
,dis
≥Compatible with: FAT 12 or FAT 16
HD
Suitable SD Memory Cards
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with the following capacities (from 8 MB to 2 GB).
8 MB,
128 MB,
16 MB,
256 MB,
32 MB,
512 MB,
64 MB,
1 GB,
2 GB (Maximum)
≥Useable memory is slightly less than the card capacity.
≥Please confirm the latest information on the following website.
(This site is in English only.)
≥If the SD Memory Card is formatted on other equipment, the time spent for recording may become longer. Also if the SD Memory Card is
formatted on a PC, you may not be able to use it on this unit. In these cases, format the card on this unit (➡ 56, 76).
≥This unit supports SD Memory Cards formatted in FAT 12 system and FAT 16 system based on SD Memory Card Specifications.
≥We recommend using a Panasonic SD card.
≥Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
Structure of folders displayed by this unit
The following
can be displayed on this unit.
XXX: Letters
¢¢¢: Numbers
Card
DVD-RAM
(Higher folder)
DCIM
(Picture folder)
¢¢¢XXXXX
JPEG
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
(Higher folder)
DCIM¢¢¢
XXXX¢¢¢¢.TIF
(Picture folder)
¢¢¢XXXXX
§
IM¢¢CDPF or IMEXPORT
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
XXXX¢¢¢¢.TIF
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
XXXX¢¢¢¢.TIF
§
DCIM
¢¢¢XXXXX
SD_VIDEO
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
XXXX¢¢¢¢.TIF
(MPEG2 folder)
PRG¢¢¢
MOV¢¢¢.MOD
MOV¢¢¢.MOI
PRG¢¢¢.PGI
(MPEG2 information folder)
MGR_INFO
§ Folders can be created on other equipment. However, these folders cannot be selected as a copying destination.
≥The folder cannot be displayed if the numbers are all “0” (e.g., DCIM000, etc.).
≥If a folder name or file name has been input using other equipment, the name may not be displayed properly or you may not be able to play
or edit the data.
RQT8388
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important notes for recording
[HDD] [RAM]
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Select the main or secondary audio before
recording
When recording a
bilingual programme
Both main and secondary audio can be recorded.
You can change the audio during playback.
(➡ 32, Changing audio during play)
(➡ 62, Bilingual Audio Selection)
M 1
However in the following cases, select whether to
record the main or secondary audio:
–Recording sound in LPCM (➡ 62, Audio Mode for
XP Recording)
Hello
The selected
audio only is
recorded.
–“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (➡ 24)
M 2
M 1
Hello
Hallo
If you record from external equipment
–Select “M 1” or “M 2” on the external equipment.
If you record from external equipment
–Select both “M 1” and “M 2” on the external
equipment.
[HDD] [RAM]
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
When recording 16:9
aspect (Widescreen)
programmes
Recorded in 4:3 aspect
16:9 aspect (Widescreen)
Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD (➡ 24).
You can copy titles in high speed mode (max. speed is 86X§); however, the following settings are necessary
before recording to the HDD.
When you want to copy
titles in high speed
mode from the HDD to
DVD-R, etc.
§ Depending on the disc, max. speed may vary.
Record to the HDD
Setup
Settings for Recording
Recording time in EP mode EP (8 Hours)
Rec for High Speed Copy
DVD Speed for High Speed Copy
On
HDD
Tuning
Maximum
Disc
Picture
Sound
High speed copy to DVD-R, etc.
It is not possible to record digital broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” onto DVD-R, DVD-RW, +R,
+RW or 8 cm DVD-RAM discs. Use the HDD or CPRM (➡ 76) compatible DVD-RAM.
When recording digital
broadcasts
[RAM] CPRM compatible discs only.
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
[HDD]
Y
k
(Y: Can do, t: Cannot do)
≥“One time only recording” titles can only be transferred from the HDD to CPRM compatible DVD-RAM (They
are deleted from the HDD). They cannot be copied.
≥Even when copying to videotape the title may not be copied correctly because of the copy guard.
≥You cannot copy a playlist created from “One time only recording” titles.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Playing the disc on
other DVD players
The disc must be finalized after recording or copying (➡ 57).
It is necessary to finalize DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or copying titles to them. You can then play
them as a commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record
or copy.§
§You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.
Play on other DVD equipment
Record to DVD-R, etc.
Í
/I
Í
D
O
U
B
L
E
R
E
-
M
A
S
T
E
R
C
D
S
E
Q
U
E
N
T
I
A
L
DISC
1
2
3
4
5
∫
;
1
:/6
5/9
D
I
S
C
E
X
C
H
A
N
G
E
D
I
S
C
S
K
I
P
<OPEN/CLOSE
H
RC
SEA
R
ENTE
V
O
L
Y
PLA
DIS
U
MEN
OP
T
URN
RET
NU
ME
O
N
OFF
DC
IN
9V
Finalize
EN
OP
D
UN
RO
UR
A.S
E
EP
EA
T
R
MOD
ITOR
PIC
MON
E
M
ODE
TUR
Recording to DVD-R DL You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
and +R DL
≥It is not possible to record to both HDD (Hard Disk Drive) and DVD drive simultaneously.
RQT8388
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care
The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special device
that is easily susceptible to damage.
As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.
∫ The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust
Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be
possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.
e
r
∫ The HDD is a temporary storage device
a
The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or
saving recorded content to a disc.
∫ Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD
If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this
condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer become usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem,
copy all content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.
dlingc
a
h
)
e
iv
≥When the HDD has been automatically placed in the SLEEP mode (➡ below), or the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound.
r
d
This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
k
dis
∫ Setup precautions
∫ Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or
r
≥Do not place in an enclosed area so the rear cooling fan
and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.
≥Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to
vibration or impact.
breakdown
The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor,
etc. gets inside the unit.
D(Ha
∫ While operating
≥Do not place on anything that
generates heat like a video cassette
recorder, etc.
≥Do not place in an area often subject to
temperature changes.
≥Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The
HDD may become damaged.)
ing/HD
This unit
VCR
d
r
≥Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket, or flip the power breaker switch.
While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or
movement due to rotation is normal.
o
c
e
r
≥Place in an area where condensation
r
o
does not occur. Condensation is a phenomenon where moisture
forms on a cold surface when there is an extreme change in
temperature. Condensation may cause internal damage to the
unit.
f
s
e
∫ When moving the unit
1 Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the
display.)
≥Conditions where condensation may occur
–When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving from
a very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa, or
when subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air
directly impacts the unit). When the HDD (warms during
operation) is subjected to cold air, condensation may form on
the inside of the HDD and may cause damage to the HDD
heads, etc.
2 Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket.
3 Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx.
2 minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock.
(Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating
for a short time.)
not
ta
Impor
–When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.
–During the rainy season.
In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit
adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until
condensation is gone.
∫ HDD recording time remaining
This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which
may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.
If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording. (Deleting a playlist
will not increase the amount of time.)
∫ When “SLEEP” appears on the unit’s display
The HDD has been automatically placed in the SLEEP mode. (The HDD continues to rotate at high speed while the unit is on. In order to extend
the life of the HDD, the HDD will be placed in the SLEEP mode if no operation has been performed for 30 minutes while there is no disc on the
disc tray.)
≥While in SLEEP mode play or recording may not start right away because the HDD takes time to be re-activated.
≥When not using the unit, we recommend removing the disc in the tray in order to set the HDD to the SLEEP mode.
∫ Indemnity concerning recorded content
Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or
edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a
case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).
RQT8388
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disc and card handling
∫ How to hold a disc or card
∫ Handling precautions
Do not touch the recorded surface or the terminal surface.
≥Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc
warping and un-balanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)
≥Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.
≥Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.
≥Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.
≥Do not expose the terminals of the card to water, garbage or other
strange things.
∫ Concerning non-cartridge discs
Be careful about scratches and dirt.
≥Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.
≥Do not use the following discs:
–Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels
(rental discs, etc.).
∫ If there is dirt or condensation on the disc
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
–Discs that are badly warped or cracked.
–Irregularly shaped discs, such as heart
shapes.
≥Do not place in the following areas:
–In direct sunlight.
–In very dusty or humid areas.
–Near a heater.
–Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature
(condensation can occur).
–Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.
≥To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases
or cartridges when you are not using them.
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a problem
with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for any subsequent damage caused by
such loss.
Examples of causes of such losses are
≥A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company.
≥A disc used as described above and then played again in this unit.
≥A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this unit.
Unit care
The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.
Do not place the unit on
amplifiers or equipment
that may become hot.
The heat can damage the unit.
To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
≥Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.
≥Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the
instructions that came with the cloth.
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and
viewing pleasure.
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it
[Note]
Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.
impossible to record or play discs.
Use the DVD lens cleaner about once every year, depending on
frequency of use and the operating environment. Carefully read the
lens cleaner’s instructions before use.
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the
unit.
DVD lens cleaner: RP-CL720E
RQT8388
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Included accessories
Please check and identify the supplied accessories.
(Product numbers correct as of September 2006. These may be subject to change.)
∏
∏
∏
∏
∏
2
RF coaxial cables
2
Batteries
for remote control
1
Audio/video
cable
1
Remote control
1
AC mains lead
ion
≥For use with this unit only. Do not
use it with other equipment.
Also, do not use cords for other
equipment with this unit.
(EUR7659T20)
rmat
o
inf
l
o
r
cont
e
mot
Thre
The remote control information
/
ies
r
o
∫ Batteries
∫ Use
≥Insert so the poles (i and j) match those in the remote control.
Remote control signal sensor
≥When closing the lid, insert it from the j (minus) side.
es
ac
d
e
d
u
l
/Inc
re
a
c
20
20
30
R6/LR6, AA
30
≥Do not use rechargeable type batteries.
≥Do not mix old and new batteries.
≥Do not use different types at the same time.
≥Do not heat or expose to flame.
7 m directly in front of the unit
hadlg/Unit
≥Do not take apart or short circuit.
≥Do not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.
≥Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.
car
d
n
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can
damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.
sca
Di
Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long
period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.
Remote control operations (➡ 12)
[Note]
If you cannot operate the unit or television using the remote control
after changing the batteries, please re-enter the codes (➡ 20).
RQT8388
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control reference guide
Remote control
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.
1 Turn the unit on (➡ 18)
2 Select drive (HDD, DVD or SD) (➡ 22, 30, 36)
3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers
4 Cancel
5 Basic operations for recording and play
6 Show status messages/Digital channel information (➡ 21, 39)
7 Selection/Enter, Frame-by-frame (➡ 32)
8 Show Top menu/Direct Navigator (➡ 30, 31, 40)
9 Show sub menu (➡ 40)
>
DVD
TV
Í
1
2
Í
: Select audio (➡ 32)
VOLUME
CH
“Red” button for Timer recording programme screen/Direct
Navigator/Edit Favourites screen/Manual tuning settings
(➡ 28, 30, 65, 66)
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
PAGE
CH
; “Green” button for Direct Navigator/Edit Favourites screen
(➡ 36, 65)
< Start recording (➡ 22)
= Change recording mode (➡ 22)
> Transmit the remote control signal
? Television operation (➡ 20)
@ Channel select/Change pages in the Edit Favourites screen
(➡ 21, 65)
2 3
1
@
4 5 6
3
ANALOGUE
A
B
C
8 9
7
CH
G-Code
INPUT
A Select analogue channel (➡ 21)
B Input select (AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4 or DV) (➡ 54)
C Show G-CODE screen (➡ 26)
0
SELECT
4
5
SKIP
SLOW/SSEARCH
D Skip the specified time (➡ 32)
E Show timer recording programme screen (➡ 27)
F Show FUNCTIONS window (➡ 59)
G Return to previous screen
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
H Create chapter (➡ 32)
TIME SLIP
“Yellow” button for Edit Favourites screen (➡ 65)
I Skip 30 seconds forward (➡ 32)
“Blue” button for Digital channel information screen/Timer
recording programme screen/Edit Favourites screen
(➡ 21, 27, 65)
6
7
D
E
/
8
F
J Delete items (➡ 46)
K Show on-screen menu (➡ 38)
ENTER
SUB MENU
RETURN
G
H
I
S
9
CREATE
CHAPTER
MANUAL SKIP
DELETE
AUDIO
:
;
REC
REC MODE DISPLAY
J
K
<
=
RQT8388
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Main unit
3
5
4
2
1
DRIVE
SELECT
REC
OPEN/CLOSE
k1.3
CH
guide
e
S VIDEO IN VIDEO IN L/MONO -AUDIO IN-
AV3
R
DV IN
nc
e
r
6
e
f
8
;
7
<
=
9
:
e
Opening the front panel
r
l
o
Press down on the
part with your finger
Contr
1 Standby/on switch (Í/I) (➡ 18)
8 Open/close disc tray (➡ 22, 30)
9 Select drive (➡ 22, 30, 36)
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
: Stop (➡ 22, 31)
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In
standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of power.
2 Disc tray (➡ 22, 30)
3 Connection for digital video (DV) camcorder (➡ 54)
4 SD card slot (➡ below)
5 Display (➡ below)
; Start play (➡ 30)
< Start recording (➡ 22)/Specify a time to stop recording (➡ 24)
= Remote control signal sensor
6 Connection for camcorder etc. (➡ 54)
7 Channel select (➡ 21)
Rear panel terminals (➡ 14–17)
Inserting, Removing the SD card
When the card indicator (“SD”) on the unit’s display is flashing, the card is being read from or written to. Do not turn off the unit or remove the card.
Such action may result in malfunction or loss of the card’s contents.
≥Inserting foreign objects can cause a malfunction.
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB (➡ 7).
Opening the cover
Inserting the card
Removing the card
Closing the cover
Press the protruding
part to open the
cover.
Press down.
1
2
Press on the centre of
the card.
Pull it straight out.
Press on the centre of the
card until it clicks into
place.
If you are using a
miniSD card, insert it
into the miniSD card
adaptor that comes
with the card.
ADAPTER
Insert and remove this
adaptor from the unit.
Insert the card label up with
the cut-off corner on the right.
(Do not forget to close the cover. ➡ right)
Automatic drive select function
≥If you insert an SD card while the unit is stopped, the “SD Card” screen is displayed. Select an item and press [ENTER] to switch to the SD drive
(➡ 36, 52).
If you remove an SD card, the HDD drive is automatically selected.
The unit’s display
5
2
1
REC
3
4
PLAY
6
7
8
1
Playback
Recording/Playback
Recording
REC
REC
PLAY
PLAY
2 Timer recording indicator
3 Lights when the SD card is inserted in the card slot
4 Lights when a disc that is supported by this unit is inserted in the
5 Lights when the digital channel is selected
6 Lights when the HDD, DVD or SD drive is selected
7 Main display section
RQT8388
tray
8 Recording mode
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 1 Connection
Make sure to use the pair of supplied RF coaxial cables
Use the pair of supplied RF coaxial cables only when you make connections to the unit through its RF IN and RF OUT terminals. Striping may
appear and disrupt images on the TV if you use different cables for connection.
≥Before connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.
≥Select the connection pattern that matches your environment from pattern A–B. Confirm connections not listed below with your
dealer.
When the unit is not to be used for a long time
To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This unit consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off
[approx. 2 W (Power Save mode)]
When “Power Save” is set to “On”, the “Quick Start” function does not work.
This unit is a DVD recorder with an integrated DVB tuner. This means that you can receive and record both analogue and terrestrial digital
channels without having to connect an additional DVB receiving unit (set-top box).
Connecting a television
A
To the aerial
Aerial cable
Television’s rear panel
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
R
L
VHF/UHF
RF IN
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
Red White Yellow
AC mains lead
(included)
2
1
Connect only after all other
RF coaxial
4
RF coaxial cable
(included)
3
Other connections
(➡ 16, 17)
connections are complete.
cable
(included)
Audio/Video cable
(included)
Cooling fan
RF
OUT
RF
IN
Red White Yellow
(
)
AV1 TV
AV OUT
Y
PB
PR
OPTICAL
AC IN
)
AV2(EXT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S
VIDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
This unit’s rear panel
Connecting to a television with 21-pin Scart terminal
You can also connect with the AV1 terminal on this unit using the 21-pin Scart cable.
If your television is equipped with RGB input capability, by connecting with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable you can see video using RGB
output on this unit.
[Required]setting]
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (➡ 63)
Connecting to a VCR with 21-pin Scart terminal
You can also connect with the AV2 terminal on this unit using the 21-pin Scart cable.
[Required]setting]
“AV2 Input” in the Setup menu (➡ 63)
RQT8388
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a television and VCR
B
Connect the unit directly to the television
If you connect the unit through an AV selector or video cassette recorder to the
television, video signal will be affected by copyright protection systems and the
picture may not be shown correctly.
Television
≥When connecting to a television with a built-in VCR
Connect to the input terminals on the television side if there are both
television and VCR input terminals.
VCR
ion
This unit
Connecting an Analogue television and VCR
Conect
To the aerial
1
P
Analogue television’s rear panel
Aerial
cable
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
R
L
VHF/UHF
RF IN
STE
1
Red White Yellow
AC mains lead
(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
6
5
Audio/Video cable
Other connections (➡ 16, 17)
RF coaxial
cable
(included)
(included)
Cooling fan
RF
OUT
RF
IN
Red White Yellow
(
)
AV1 TV
AV OUT
PB
PR
OPTICAL
AC IN
(
)
S
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
Red White YellowVIDEO
AV2 EXT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
OMPONENT VIDEO OUT
This unit’s rear panel
4
2
Audio/Video cable
RF coaxial cable
(included)
3
RF coaxial cable
Red White Yellow
VCR’s rear
panel
RF OUT
VHF/UHF
RF IN
R
L
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO OUT
Connecting a Digital television and VCR
To the aerial
Aerial cable
Digital television’s rear panel
Splitter
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
R
L
To household mains socket
VHF/UHF
RF IN
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
Red White Yellow
AC mains lead
(included)
Connect only after all
4
1
other connections
are complete.
6
RF coaxial cable
5
(included)
Audio/Video cable
Other connections (➡ 16, 17)
(included)
Cooling fan
RF
OUT
RF
IN
Red White Yellow
(
)
AV1 TV
AV OUT
PB
PR
OPTICAL
This unit’s
rear panel
AC IN
(
)
R-AUDIO-L
S
VIDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
Red White VYIDeEOllow
AV2 EXT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Audio/Video cable
2
RF coaxial cable
(included)
3
Red White Yellow
VCR’s rear
panel
RQT8388
VHF/UHF
RF IN
R
L
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO OUT
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 1 Connection
Other connections
Connecting a television with COMPONENT VIDEO
terminals
Connecting a television with S VIDEO terminals
The S VIDEO OUT terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO OUT terminal. (Actual results depend on the television.)
Television’s rear panel
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
PR
AUDIO IN
Television’s rear panel
R
L
Y
PB
AUDIO IN VIDEO S VIDEO
R
L
IN
IN
Red White
Red White
Video cable
Audio/Video
cable
(included)
S Video
cable
Audio/Video cable
(included)
Red White
RF
OUT
RF
N
(
)
AV1 TV
AV OUT
Y
PB
PR
OPTICAL
)
AV2(EXT
S
VIDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO
(PCM/BBITSTRE
R-AUDDIO-L
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Red White
This unit’s rear panel
AV OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals can be used for either interlace or
progressive output (➡ 77) and provide a purer picture than the
S VIDEO OUT terminal.
OPTICAL
S VIDEO
DIGITAL AAUDIO OUUT
(PCM/BITSSTREAM)
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.
If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube)
Use component output with progressive “Off” (Factory setting ➡ 63),
even if it is progressive compatible, because progressive output can
cause some flickering. This is the same for multi system televisions
using PAL mode.
This unit’s rear panel
CRT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Progressive output
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
This unit
Connecting an amplifier or system component
∫ Connecting an amplifier with a digital input
∫ Connecting a stereo amplifier
terminal
≥To enjoy multi-channel surround sound DVD-Video, connect an
amplifier with Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG decoders.
[Required]setting]
“Digital Audio Output” in the Setup menu (➡ 62)
≥When this unit is connected to an amplifier with an Optical digital
audio cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable, you
can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting
“Digital Audio Output” to “Optical Only” in the Setup menu (➡ 63).
In this case audio is only output from the amplifier not the
television.
Amplifier’s rear panel
AUDIO IN
R
L
Red White
≥Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable (not included),
check the terminal shape of the connected equipment.
≥You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not suited to DVD.
≥Even if using this connection, output will be only 2 channels when
playing DVD-Audio.
Audio cable
Amplifier’s
rear panel
OPTICAL IN
Red White
AV OUT
Insert fully, with this
side facing up.
Optical digital
audio cable
Do not bend
sharply when
connecting.
OPTICAL
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S
VIDEO
DIGITAL AAUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITTSTREAM)
This unit’s rear panel
AV OUT
OPTICAL
IDEO
DIGITAL AAUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITTSTREAM)
RQT8388
This unit’s rear panel
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) terminal
HDMI is the next-generation interface for digital devices. When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video
signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High
Definition Television), the output can be switched to 1080i or 720p HD video.
≥Please use HDMI cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
Preparation
From the Setup menu (➡ 63), set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical”.
Connecting to a TV
Connecting to an amplifier/receiver
ion
Television’s
rear panel
Television’s
rear panel
HDMI IN
HDMI IN
Conect
1
P
Amplifier/receiver’s
rear panel
This unit’s
rear panel
HDMI OUT
HDMI IN
HDMI AV OUT
STE
AV OUT
OPTICAL
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S
VIDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITTSTREAM)
This unit’s
rear panel
HDMI AV OUT
≥If connecting to a TV incompatible with CPPM (Content Protection
for Prerecorded Media, ➡ 76), copy-protected DVD-Audio cannot
be output through the HDMI terminal. Connect the audio cables
(red and white) to the corresponding audio input terminals.
AV OUT
OPTICAL
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S
VIDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITTSTREAM)
≥
If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel
output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed ( 76)
and output as 2 channels. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)
➡
≥If connecting to an amplifier/receiver incompatible with CPPM
(Content Protection for Prerecorded Media, ➡ 76), copy-
protected DVD-Audio cannot be output through the HDMI
terminal. Connect to the amplifier with an optical digital cable or
audio cables (red and white).
≥For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content
Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital
DVI input terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all
when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot
be output.)
Control with HDMI (HDAVI ControlTM)
What is HDAVI Control?
HDAVI Control is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this unit, and a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or receiver under HDAVI Control.
You can use this function by connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable. See the operating instructions for connected equipment for
operational details.
≥It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number: RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.
≥Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
Preparation
1. Connect this unit to your TV or receiver with an HDMI cable (➡ above).
2. Set “Control with HDMI” to “On” (➡ 63). (The default setting is “On”.)
3. Set the HDAVI Control operations on the connected equipment (e.g., TV).
4. Turn on all HDAVI Control compatible equipment, turn the TV off/on, and then select this unit’s input channel on the connected TV so that the
HDAVI Control function works properly.
Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat this procedure.
What you can do with HDAVI Control
(When the TV is on)
When the TV is on and the following operations are performed, the TV will automatically switch the input channel
and displays the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
Easy playback
Press [FUNCTIONS]§1, [1] (PLAY)§2, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [G-Code], [PROG/CHECK].
(When the TV is off)
When the TV is off and the following operations are performed, the TV will automatically turn on and displays the
corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
Power on link
Press [FUNCTIONS]§1, [1] (PLAY)§2, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [G-Code], [PROG/CHECK].
≥[DVD-V] [DVD-A] [CD] [VCD] and MP3
The TV is automatically turned on when you insert the discs.
When you set the TV to standby mode, the unit is also automatically set to standby mode. The unit automatically
Power off link
sets to standby mode even if the FUNCTIONS screen, the status message or the on-screen menu is displayed,
during playback or when the unit is only timer recording.
Even if the TV is set to standby mode, the unit will not set to standby mode at the same time in the following
conditions:
–when you pressed [¥ REC] and the unit is recording,
–when copying
–when finalizing, etc.
≥When this unit is connected to an HDAVI Control compatible Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable, the receiver
will also set to standby mode.
§1 This button is available only when this unit is on.
§2 When this button is pressed, the playback image is not immediately displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the contents
from where playback started.
In this case, press [:] or [6] to go back to where playback started.
[Note]
≥These functions may not work normally depending on the equipment condition.
≥About HDAVI Control function, read the manual of the connected equipment (e.g., TV) too.
RQT8388
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings
3 Press [3, 4] to select your area and
Í/ l
press [ENTER].
DRIVE
SELECT
REC
OPEN/CLOSE
TV Aspect
16:9 WIDE TV
4:3 TV
k
1
.3
16:9
4:3
Letterbox
DVD
TV
SELECT
Í DVD
Í
Í
ENTER
VOLUME
CH
RETURN
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
PAGE
CH
2 3
4 5 6
1
4 Press [3, 4] to select the TV aspect
Numbered
buttons
and press [ENTER].
ANALOGUE
8 9
CH
7
≥16:9: 16:9 widescreen television
G-Code
INPUT
≥4:3:
4:3 aspect television
SELECT
0
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
[HDD] [RAM] Titles are recorded as they appear on screen.
[DVD-V] Video recorded for a widescreen is played as Pan &
Scan (unless prohibited by the producer of the disc)
(➡ 77).
≥Letterbox: 4:3 aspect television
Widescreen picture is shown in the letterbox style (➡ 77).
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
TIME SLIP
/
To stop partway
ENTER
Press [RETURN].
3,4,2,1
ENTER
SUB MENU
RETURN
S
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
AUDIO
MANUAL SKIP
When clock setting screen is displayed
DISPLAY DELETE
REC
REC MODE
In step 2, if the clock setting screen appears on the television, set
the clock manually.
This is a 24-hour clock.
Clock
Time
0
Date
1
:
00
:
00
.
1
.
2006
Number
0
9
1 Turn on the television and select the
Please set the clock.
ENTER: access RETURN: leave
CHANGE
SELECT
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
ENTER
RETURN
1
Press [2, 1] to select the item you want to change and press
[3, 4] to change the setting.
The items change as follows:
2 Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit on.
Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J
≥You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.
Press [ENTER] when you have finished the settings.
DVB Auto-Setup starts. The unit will search for the terrestrial
digital channels. TV channels will be located and stored ready
for use.
2
This takes about 5 minutes.
TV aspect setting screen (➡ above) appears.
(➡ Go to step 4)
–Terrestrial digital channels are stored into logical channels
numbers.
–Analogue channels are preset at the time of shipping. If you
would like to add new TV channels, set them manually
(➡ 66).
DVB Auto-Setup
∫ To confirm that stations have been tuned
Please wait!
Ch 6
69
Prog. Channel Service Name
Net ID TS ID Quality
correctly (➡ 66)
352
354
ABC
ABC 2
12289
12302
12302 12289
9
9
1
2
∫ To restart set up (➡ 66)
RETURN: to cancel
RETURN
DVB Auto-Setup is complete when Time Zone setting screen
appears.
The time information for your region can be obtained.
Time Zone
NSW / ACT
Victoria
Queensland
South Australia
Western Australia
Northern Territory
SELECT
Tasmania
ENTER
RETURN
RQT8388
≥If the clock setting screen is displayed (➡ right).
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 3 Set up to match your television and remote control
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Connection”
and press [1].
Setup
DVD
TV Aspect
4:3
Off
PAL
TV
Progressive
TV System
HDMI Settings
AV1 Output
AV2 Input
Í
Í
TV operation
buttons
Tuning
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
Disc
Video
Video
l
Picture
Sound
Display
PAGE
CH
o
r
2 3
1
TAB
SELECT
ENTER
Numbered
buttons
Connection
Others
ont
RETURN
4 5 6
c
ANALOGUE
8 9
CH
7
ote
G-Code
INPUT
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Progressive”
SELECT
0
m
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
e
r
and press [ENTER].
d
n
Setup
Progressive
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
On
Off
TIME SLIP
ona
i
Tuning
/
s
i
Disc
v
Picture
Sound
Display
le
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
ENTER
SELECT
ENTER
te
Connection
Others
RETURN
3,4,2,1
ENTER
SUB MENU
RETURN
our
S
y
h
CREATE
CHAPTER
AUDIO
MANUAL SKIP
6 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press
tc
DISPLAY DELETE
REC
REC MODE
[ENTER].
Output becomes progressive.
[Note]
≥When connected to a regular television (CRT: Cathode ray tube) or
a multi system television using PAL mode, even if it is progressive
compatible, progressive output can cause some flickering. Turn off
“Progressive” if this occurs (➡ 38).
uptoma
e
S
P3
≥Picture will not be displayed correctly if connected to an
incompatible television.
≥There is no output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals if
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu is set to “RGB 1 (without
component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)” (➡ 63).
/STE
To enjoy progressive video
You can enjoy progressive video by connecting this unit’s
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals to an LCD/plasma television
or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan (➡ 77).
ings
t
t
e
ts
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
c
e
1
While stopped
p
s
Press [FUNCTIONS].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
FUNCTIONS
HDD
Remain 70:00 SP
Playback
ndTVa
Recording
a
Delete
Copy
To Others
ENTER
RETURN
tings
e
s
n
o
i
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
pt
e
c
e
and press [ENTER].
lr
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
ne
press [ENTER].
Setup
Cha
Edit Favourites
Auto-Setup Restart
Digital
2
P
Tuning
Add New DVB Services
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Signal Condition
Analogue
Manual
STE
SELECT
TAB
Connection
Others
RETURN
RQT8388
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 3 Set up to match your television and remote control
Refer to the control reference on page 19.
When other Panasonic products
respond to this remote control
Change the remote control code on the main unit and the remote
control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic products
close together.
Television operation
You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to turn
the television on/off, change the television input mode, select the
television channel and change the television volume.
Use “DVD 1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.
DVD
TV
Í
Volume
Í
VOLUME
Turn TV on/off
Input select
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
1
While stopped
Channel
Select
PAGE
CH
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 3
1
4 5 6
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
ANALOGUE
and press [ENTER].
1
Point the remote control at the television
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
While pressing [Í TV], enter the code
press [ENTER].
with the numbered buttons.
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
e.g.,
01:
[0] ➡ [1]
10:
[1] ➡ [0]
press [1].
Manufacturer and Code No.
Brand
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Remote
Code
Control” and press [ENTER].
Panasonic/National
GOLDSTAR/LG
HITACHI
01, 02, 03, 04
15, 16
08
6 Press [3, 4] to select the code (“DVD
1”, “DVD 2” or “DVD 3”) and press
[ENTER].
JVC
07
MITSUBISHI
NEC
09, 10
13
Remote Control
Setup
PHILIPS
12
Press “ ” and “ENTER” together
for more than 2 seconds on the remote
control.
SAMSUNG
SANYO
12, 17, 18
14, 19
11
Tuning
Disc
Picture
SHARP
SONY
05
To change the code on the remote control
TOSHIBA
06
7 While pressing [ENTER], press and
hold the numbered button ([1], [2] or
[3]) for more than 2 seconds.
2 Test by turning on the television and
changing channels.
≥Repeat the procedure until you find the code that allows
correct operation.
8 Press [ENTER].
≥If your television brand is not listed or if the code listed for
your television does not allow control of your television, this
remote control is not compatible with your television.
∫ When the following indicator appears on the
unit’s display
[Note]
The unit’s remote control code
≥If your television brand has more than one code listed, select the
one that allows correct operation.
Change the code on the remote control to match the main unit’s
(➡ step 7).
[Note]
Executing “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu returns the main
unit code to “DVD 1”. Change the remote control code to 1
(➡ step 7).
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
RQT8388
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Watching television
Í/ l
Digital channel information
While stopped
DRIVE
SELECT
REC
OPEN/CLOSE
k
1
.3
Press [ ] to show the screen information.
≥When the digital channel information is being displayed,
–press [2, 1] to show next programme information.
–press [3, 4] to view other channel and press [ENTER].
DVD
TV
Í DVD
Í
on
Í
i
VOLUME
–press [ ] again and detailed information about the programmes
CH
s
i
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
v
will be displayed (only when “info ” is displayed).
≥Using “On-Screen Messages” (➡ 62) in the Setup menu, you can
choose to display or hide digital channel information and change
the length of time it is displayed for.
PAGE
CH
le
2 3
4 5 6
1
Numbered
buttons
CH W X
ANALOGUE CH
ingte
ANALOGUE
h
Programme name
Signal Quality
8 9
CH
7
c
t
Category
G-Code
INPUT
(➡ below)
Current time
Channel
a
SELECT
0
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
l/W
352 ABC2
ABC News
19:00 - 19:30
No Signal
All Services
18:53
Change the
category
(➡ below).
o
r
Change Category
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
NOW
info
ont
Encrypted PG Multi-Audio
TIME SLIP
c
/
The parental
ote
ratings level is
Programme is broadcast in multi-channel
sound (➡ 39, DVB Multi Audio).
m
displayed.
e
r
ENTER
During scrambled broadcasting.
Broadcast time
d
n
3,4,2,1
ENTER
SUB MENU
RETURN
S
a
n
CREATE
CHAPTER
≥Signal Quality
AUDIO
MANUAL SKIP
o
i
“Blue”
No Signal: The digital broadcast signal is not being received.
Bad Signal: Due to poor weather conditions, etc., the digital
broadcast signal has been interrupted.
s
i
DISPLAY DELETE
REC
REC MODE
v
e
l
No Service:No broadcasts are currently available.
te
If “No Signal” or “Bad Signal” is displayed, check to make sure that
the aerial is correctly positioned.
our
This unit is a DVD recorder with an integrated DVB tuner. This
means that you can receive and record both analogue and
terrestrial digital channels without having to connect an additional
DVB receiving unit (set-top box).
hy
≥If the digital channel information shows “No Signal”, “Bad Signal”,
“Encrypted”, “No Service” or a digital radio station is selected, the
digital channel information cannot disappear.
c
t
≥If you record a digital radio broadcast or a digital broadcast that is
not being received correctly, digital channel information is also
recorded and will remain visible during playback.
Select the channel
uptoma
t
e
∫ To change the category to easily select one of
S
3
1 Turn on the television and select the
your favourite channels
≥You can press the “Blue” button to change the category [e.g., Free
TV, Radio, Edit Favourites screen (➡ 65)] and then press [3, 4] to
select the channel.
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
EP
T
S
2 Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit on.
3 Press [W X CH] to select the channel.
Everytime you change the station, a digital channel
information appear automatically (terrestrial digital channels
only).
Channels are displayed in the order of digital channels first,
and then followed by analogue channels.
≥Digital channel
You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15:
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥Analogue channel
You can also select the channel with the following steps.
1
Press [ANALOGUE CH].
2
e.g.,
Press the numbered buttons to select the channel.
5:
[0] ➡ [5]
15:
[1] ➡ [5]
[Note]
This unit can receive Standard Definition (SD) broadcasts, but is
unable to receive High Definition (HD) broadcasts. When High
Definition (HD) programmes are broadcast, “Unable to decode HD”
is displayed in the digital channel information (➡ right).
RQT8388
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording television programmes
3 Press [W X CH] to select the channel.
2
5
REC
Channels are displayed in the order of digital channels first,
and then followed by analogue channels.
≥Digital channel
DRIVE
SELECT
OPEN/CLOSE
k
1
.3
CH
S
VIDEO IN VIDEO IN L/MONO -AUDIO IN-
AV3
R
DV IN
∫
1
3
You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
SELECT
AV
15:
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
1
PAGE
CH
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
2 3
4 5 6
1
Numbered
buttons
3
≥Analogue channel
ANALOGUE
ANALOGUE
CH
8 9
CH
7
G-Code
INPUT
SELECT
0
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
You can also select the channel with the following steps.
1
Press [ANALOGUE CH].
;
2
e.g.,
Press the numbered buttons to select the channel.
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
∫
5:
[0] ➡ [5]
TIME SLIP
15:
[1] ➡ [5]
/
4 Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode (XP, SP, LP or EP).
ENTER
3,4,2,1
SUB MENU
RETURN
ENTER
S
Remaining time
CREATE
CHAPTER
AUDIO
MANUAL SKIP
on the disc
AUDIO
DISPLAY DELETE
REC
REC MODE
≥To record sound using LPCM (XP mode only):
Set the “Audio Mode for XP Recording” to “LPCM” in the
Setup menu (➡ 62).
5
4
See also “Important notes for recording” (➡ 8).
Depending on the type of disc used for recording or the type of
broadcast, there may be restrictions on the title you are trying to record.
≥[RAM] It is not possible to record continuously from one side of a
double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc and
turn it over.
5 Press [¥ REC] to start recording.
REC
≥[+RW] You can create Top Menu using “Create Top Menu” (➡ 57).
Recording or editing on the disc may delete the menu. In that case,
create the menu again.
Recording will take place on open space on the HDD or on
disc. Data will not be overwritten.
You cannot change the channel or recording mode during
recording. You can change the channel or recording mode while
paused; however, the recording will then be as a separate title.
≥You can record while the unit is in standby for timer
recording, but once the time for the timer recording to begin
is reached, any recording taking place will stop and the timer
recording will begin.
≥[HDD] [RAM] You can change the audio being received by
pressing [AUDIO] during recording. (Does not affect the
recording of audio.)
≥When recording a digital broadcast, select the audio that you want
to record in “DVB Multi Audio” in the on-screen menu (➡ 39).
≥
[HDD]
≥
You can record up to 500 titles on HDD. (When continuously recording
for long durations, titles are automatically divided every 8 hours.)
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›]
≥You can record up to 99 titles on one disc.
[+R] [+RW]
≥You can record up to 49 titles on one disc.
[SD]
≥It is not possible to record onto a card.
≥When recording a digital radio broadcast or a digital
broadcast that is not being received correctly, the digital
channel information (➡ 21) is also recorded.
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
∫ To pause recording
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
Press [;].
HDD or DVD drive.
Press again to restart recording.
You can also press [¥ REC] to restart.
(Title is not split into separate titles.)
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
2
If you selected the DVD drive
∫ To stop recording
Press [∫].
≥From the start to the end of the recording is called one title.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] It takes about 30 seconds for the unit to
complete recording management information after recording finishes.
In order to play DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +R (recorded
with this unit) on other DVD players, it is necessary to finalize them (➡ 57).
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.
≥Press the button again to close the tray.
≥When using 8 cm DVD-RAM, or 8 cm DVD-R, remove the
disc from the cartridge.
Insert label-up.
∫ Cartridge disc
Quick Start (➡ 64)
1 Sec. Quick Start for Recording on DVD-RAM and HDD
(When connecting to TV using 21-pin Scart, COMPONENT
VIDEO, VIDEO or S VIDEO terminals)
From the power off state, recording on DVD-RAM and HDD starts
about 1 second after first pressing the Power button and then
sequentially pressing the REC button (Quick Start Mode).
Insert label-up with
the arrow facing in.
Insert fully.
Automatic drive select function
“Quick Start” is set to “On” at the time of purchase.
[RAM] [Only for discs with the write-protect tab on the cartridge
set to “PROTECT” (➡ 55, Cartridge-protection)]
[DVD-V] [DVD-A] [VCD] [CD]
[Note]
Startup takes up to a minute when:
–You play a disc or start recording to discs other than DVD-RAM.
–You want to make other operations.
–The clock has not been set.
≥
If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it automatically
RQT8388
switches to the DVD drive when a disc is inserted.
≥If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is
22
automatically selected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording modes and approximate recording times
Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may become shorter than indicated.
(The times provided on this chart are an estimate.)
HDD
DVD-RAM
DVD-R
DVD-RW
+R
DVD-R DL§3
(8.5 GB)
+R DL§3
(8.5 GB)
s
Single-
Double-
sided§1
(9.4 GB)
Recording Mode
[DMR-EX75]
(160 GB)
[DMR-EX85]
(250 GB)
sided
+RW
(4.7 GB)
(4.7 GB)
me
a
XP (High picture
qualityrecording
mode)
36 hours
55 hours
1 hour
2 hours
1 hour
1 hour 45 min.
1 hour 45 min.
ogr
SP (Standard
onpr
70 hours
111 hours
222 hours
443 hours
2 hours
4 hours
4 hours
8 hours
2 hours
4 hours
3 hours 35 min.
7 hours 10 min.
3 hours 35 min.
7 hours 10 min.
i
recording mode)
s
i
v
LP (Long
recording mode)
le
138 hours
EP (Extra long
recording
284 hours
8 hours
16 hours
8 hours
14 hours 20 min.
ingte
–
(212 hours§2
)
(333hours§2
)
(6 hours§2
)
(12 hours§2
)
(6 hours§2
)
(10 hours 45 min.§2
)
d
r
mode)§4
o
c
Approximately
9 hours with video
quality equivalent
to LP mode.
FR (Flexible
Recording
Mode)§4
8 hours
Re
284 hours
maximum
443 hours
maximum
8 hours
maximum
8 hours
maximum
maximum
14 hours 20 min.
for one side
§1 It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other.
§2 When “Recording time in EP mode” is set to “EP (6Hours)” in the Setup menu (➡ 61).
The sound quality is better when using “EP (6Hours)” than when using “EP (8Hours)”.
§3 You cannot record directly to DVD-R DL and +R DL discs with this unit. The table shows the recording time when copying.
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in EP mode.
When recording to the HDD in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode , you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R, +R DL or +RW
§4
discs.
≥[RAM] When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP (8 Hours)” mode, play may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM.
Use “EP (6Hours)” mode if playback may be on other equipment.
FR (Flexible Recording Mode)
You can set FR (Flexible Recording) mode when copying or programming timer recordings.
The unit automatically selects a recording rate between XP and EP (8Hours) that will enable the recordings to fit in the remaining disc space with
the best possible recording quality.
For example with a 90 minute recording to an unused DVD-RAM, the picture quality is adjusted to between “XP” and “SP”.
≥
When recording to the HDD, picture quality is automatically adjusted to precisely fit a copied title on a 4.7 GB disc.
≥All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in the display (➡ below).
Disc Insertion/Ejection
When the format confirmation screen is displayed
When removing a recorded disc
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
When you insert a new disc or a disc recorded on a computer or
other equipment, a format confirmation screen is displayed. Format
the disc to use it. However, all the recorded contents are deleted.
The following screen appears when you have not processed the disc
for play on other equipment.
Finalize
Finalize the disc so that is can be played
on other DVD players.
Note: Recording or Editing is not possible
after finalizing.This may take up to min.
Format
This disc is not formatted properly.
Format it using DVD Management?
Press the REC button to start finalize.
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit.
The disc cannot be played on other
DVD players without finalizing.
Yes
No
SELECT
RETURN
ENTER
∫ To finalize the disc
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
≥You cannot stop this process once you have started it.
≥If you want to set the background, play menu select or provide a
disc name, select “Top Menu (➡ 57)”, “Auto-Play Select (➡ 57)” or
“Disc Name (➡ 55)” in “DVD Management” before finalizing.
To format a disc
“Deleting all the contents of a disc or card—Format” (➡ 56)
∫ To open the tray without disc finalization
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.
RQT8388
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording television programmes
Recording settings for High Speed
Copy
DRIVE
OPEN/CLOSE
REC
SELECT
k
1
.3
When copying in high speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW after you
have recorded to the HDD
If copying a title using the high speed mode to a DVD-R, etc., set
“Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD.
However, the following restrictions apply:
≥When recording bilingual broadcasts, either the main or
secondary audio can be recorded.
¥ REC
∫
1
DRIVE
SELECT
DVD
TV
Í
Í
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
–If you do not connect external equipment
Select “M 1” or “M 2” in “Bilingual Audio Selection” in the
Setup menu (➡ 62).
SELECT
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
PAGE
CH
2 3
4 5 6
1
Numbered
buttons
–If you connect external equipment
Select “M 1” or “M 2” on the external equipment.
≥Even 16:9 aspect (Widescreen) programmes are recorded in
4:3 aspect.
ANALOGUE
8 9
CH
7
G-Code
INPUT
SELECT
0
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
Refer to the “Important notes for recording” for more information
(➡ 8).
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
∫
1
TIME SLIP
1
While stopped
/
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
Press [FUNCTIONS].
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
ENTER
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
3,4,2,1
and press [ENTER].
SUB MENU
RETURN
ENTER
S
CREATE
CHAPTER
AUDIO
MANUAL SKIP
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
DISPLAY DELETE
REC
REC MODE
press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc” and
press [1].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Settings for
Recording” and press [ENTER].
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Rec for High
To specify a time to stop recording—
One Touch Recording
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
During recording
Speed Copy” and press [ENTER].
7 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press
[ENTER].
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit to select the recording
time.
8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
≥You can specify up to 4 hours later.
≥The unit display changes as shown below.
OFF 0:30 ""# OFF 1:00 ""# OFF 1:30 ""# OFF 2:00
^" Counter (cancel) ,"" OFF 4:00
press [ENTER].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
,"" OFF 3:00 ,}
≥This does not work during timer recordings (➡ 26) or while using
Flexible Recording (➡ 25).
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
≥If you change the channel or recording mode while recording is
paused, the time specified to stop recording is cancelled.
≥The unit turns off automatically after the time to stop recording is
reached.
To start recording
≥Recording television programmes (➡ 22)
≥Timer recording (➡ 26)
To cancel
≥Copying from a video cassette recorder (➡ 54)
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit several times until the counter
appears.
≥The time to stop recording is cancelled; however, recording
continues.
[Note]
If you do not intend to copy titles in high speed mode to DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW, set
“Rec for High Speed Copy” to “Off”.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
RQT8388
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
When you want to start recording
Flexible Recording
(Recording that fits the remaining disc space)
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Start”
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
and press [ENTER].
The unit sets the best possible picture quality that fits the recording
within the remaining disc space. The recording mode becomes FR
mode.
≥Recording starts.
XP
SP
LP
EP
≥All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in
the display.
s
∫ Using “Flexible Rec” is convenient in these
kinds of situations.
To exit the screen without recording
e.g., HDD
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
me
Press [RETURN].
a
≥When the amount of free space on the disc makes selecting an
appropriate recording mode difficult
≥When you want to record a long programme with the best picture
quality possible
HDD
To stop recording partway
Press [∫].
Remaining
time of
recording
REC 0:59
21 DVB
ABC2
ogr
To show the remaining time
Press [ ].
L R
onpr
[HDD]
i
s
i
≥When you want to record a title to HDD so that it can then be
copied to fit one 4.7 GB disc perfectly
v
le
≥You do not need to edit the recorded title, or change the recording
mode when copying, to fit the disc space
Playing while you are recording
[HDD] [RAM]
e.g., Recording a 90 minute programme to disc
ingte
d
r
If you select XP mode, the programme will not fit one disc.
o
c
Playing from the beginning of the title you are
recording—Chasing playback
If you try to record a 90 minute
programme in XP mode, only the
first 60 minutes will fit on the disc
and the 30 minute balance will not
Re
Press [1] (PLAY) during recording.
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
There is no sound output while searching forward or backward.
get recorded.
≥Another disc is necessary.
To stop play
Press [∫].
If you select SP mode, the programme will fit one disc.
However there will be 30 minutes
remaining disc space.
To stop recording
2 seconds after play stops, press [∫].
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
To stop timer recording
2 seconds after play stops
If you select “Flexible Rec” the programme will fit one disc
perfectly.
1
2
Press [∫].
Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [ENTER].
Playing a title previously recorded while recording—
Simultaneous rec and play
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
≥You can also change the drive and play while recording. Press
[DRIVE SELECT].
Necessary space for recording
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] during
recording.
Preparation
≥Select the channel or the external input to record.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title
1
While stopped
and press [ENTER].
Press [FUNCTIONS].
≥There is no sound output while searching forward or
backward.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
To stop play
Press [∫].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Flexible Rec”
and press [ENTER].
To exit the Direct Navigator screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Flexible Rec
Maximum recording time
This is the maximum recording
time in EP (8Hours) mode.
Record in FR mode.
Maximum rec. time 8 Hour 00 Min.
Set rec. time
8 Hour 00 Min.
To stop recording
Start
Cancel
After play stops
1
2
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit screen.
If the recording is on the other drive
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive.
Press [∫].
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and
“Min.” and press [3, 4] to set the
3
recording time.
≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
To stop timer recording
After play stops
≥You cannot record more than 8 hours.
1
2
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit screen.
If the recording is on the other drive
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive.
Press [∫].
Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [ENTER].
3
4
[Note]
RQT8388
“Chasing playback” and “Simultaneous rec and play” can only be
used with programmes of the same encoding system (PAL/NTSC).
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer recording
Using G-CODE system to make timer
recordings
Entering G-CODE numbers is an easy way of timer recording. You can
find these numbers in TV listings in newspapers and magazines.
DVD
TV
Í
Í
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
[Note]
SELECT
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
≥The G-CODE system is not supported for digital broadcasts.
PAGE
CH
2 3
4 5 6
1
Numbered
buttons
1 Press [G-Code].
1:58 SP
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
ANALOGUE
G-Code
Record
Remain
8 9
CH
7
12:53:00 15. 7. TUE
G-Code
INPUT
SELECT
0
G-Code
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
Input G-Code Number 0-9, and press ENTER.
TIME SLIP
/
PROG/CHECK
2 Press the numbered buttons to enter
the G-CODE number.
3,4,2,1
ENTER
Press [2] to move back to correct a digit.
ENTER
SUB MENU
RETURN
3 Press [ENTER].
1:58 SP
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
S
CREATE
CHAPTER
AUDIO
MANUAL SKIP
“Blue”
Timer
Remain
Recording
12:54:00 15. 7. TUE
DISPLAY DELETE
REC
REC MODE
HDD
DVD
Name
Date
Start
19:00
Stop
20:00
Mode
SP
1
ARD 15. 7.TUE
HDD
REC MODE
All Services : ARD
Programme Name
≥Confirm the programme and make corrections if necessary
using [3, 4, 2, 1] (➡ 27, step 3).
≥When “-- ---” appears in the “Name” column, you cannot set
timer recording. Press [3, 4] to select desired programme
position. After you have entered the information of a TV
station, it is kept in the unit’s memory.
See also “Important notes for recording” (➡ 8).
Depending on the type of disc used for recording or the type of
broadcast, there may be restrictions on the title you are trying to
record.
4 Press [ENTER].
The settings are stored and the timer programme is on.
Timer icon is displayed in left column.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)
Timer
Remain
Recording
No. Name
ARD
Date
15. 7.TUE
Timer icon
F01
Preparation
New T
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥If recording to DVD, insert a disc that you can use for recording
(➡ 22).
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
1:58 SP
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
Timer
Remain
≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (➡ 67).
Recording
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
Drive
HDD
space
No. Name
ARD
Date
15. 7.TUE
New Timer Programme
Start Stop
22:30
DVD Mode
Check to make sure “OK”
is displayed (➡ 29).
HDD
SP
OK
F01
22:00
Repeat steps 1–4 to programme other recordings.
∫ To cancel recording when recording has already
begun (➡ 28)
∫ To release the unit from recording standby
(➡ 28)
∫ Notes on timer recording (➡ 28)
G-CODE is a registered trademark of
Gemstar Development Corporation. The
G-CODE system is manufactured under
license from Gemstar Development
Corporation.
RQT8388
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manually programming timer
recordings
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
1:58 SP
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
Timer
Remain
Recording
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
g
HDD
Drive
No. Name
Date
Start Stop
DVD Mode
space
in
New Timer Programme
d
r
o
rec
e
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New Timer
m
i
Programme” and press [ENTER].
T
3 Press [1] to move through the items
and change the items with [3, 4].
1:58 SP
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
Timer
Remain
Recording
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
HDD
DVD
Name
Date
Start
22:00
Stop
22:30
Mode
1
ARD 15. 7.TUE
HDD SP
All Services : ARD
Programme Name
Press ENTER to store the programme.
ENTER
Change
¢
Delete
0
9
Number
--
Favourite
RETURN
≥When “Name” is selected, you can press the “Blue” button to
change the category [e.g., Free TV, Radio, Edit Favourites
screen (➡ 65)] and then press [3, 4] to select the channel
you want to record.
≥Press and hold [3, 4] to alter the Start (Start time) and
Stop (Finish time) in 30-minute increments.
≥You can also set Name (Programme position/TV Station
Name), Date, Start (Start time), and Stop (Finish time) with
the numbered buttons.
≥Date
[. Date:
Current date up to one month later minus
one day
l
l
l
;:
Daily timer: SUN-SAT>MON-SAT>MON-FRI
;:
a. Weekly timer: SUN>--->SAT
≥You can also press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording
drive.
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the
“HDD” (➡ 29, Relief Recording).
≥You can also press [REC MODE] to change the recording
mode.
≥[HDD] RENEW (Auto Renewal Recording) (➡ 29)
ON!)OFF
≥Programme Name
Press [2, 1] to select “Programme Name” and press
[ENTER]. (➡ 58, Entering text)
4 Press [ENTER].
The settings are stored and the timer programme is on.
Timer icon is displayed in left column.
Timer
Remain
Recording
No. Name
ARD
Date
15. 7.TUE
Timer icon
F01
New T
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
1:58 SP
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
Timer
Remain
Recording
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
Drive
HDD
space
No. Name
ARD
Date
15. 7.TUE
Start Stop
22:30
DVD Mode
Check to make sure “OK”
is displayed (➡ 29).
HDD
SP
OK
F01
22:00
New Timer Programme
Repeat steps 2–4 to programme other recordings.
∫ To cancel recording when recording has already
begun (➡ 28)
∫ To release the unit from recording standby
(➡ 28)
RQT8388
∫ Notes on timer recording (➡ 28)
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer recording
To cancel recording when recording
has already begun
1
While the unit is on
DVD
TV
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
recording drive and press [∫].
Stop Recording
Í
Í
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
PAGE
CH
2 3
Timer recording in progress.
Stop this timer recording?
It will be cancelled if you stop.
1
4 5 6
ANALOGUE
Cancel
Stop Recording
8 9
CH
7
SELECT
G-Code
INPUT
¢
SELECT
0
RETURN
ENTER
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Stop
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
∫
Recording” and press [ENTER].
TIME SLIP
If you stop a timer recording, it will be cancelled. However, if
you have set a weekly or daily timer recording, the recording
will start from the next time the timer recording is set.
/
PROG/CHECK
ENTER
3,4,2,1
ENTER
SUB MENU
To release the unit from recording
standby
SUB MENU
RETURN
S
CREATE
CHAPTER
AUDIO
MANUAL SKIP
“Red”
≥Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer
DISPLAY DELETE
REC
REC MODE
recording list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme
and press the “Red” button.
≥The timer icon “F” (➡ 29, left column) disappears from the
timer recording list.
≥You cannot cancel timer recording standby mode as long as
even one timer icon “F” (➡ 29, left column) remains in the
timer recording list.
≥Press the “Red” button again to activate timer recording
standby.
Notes on timer recording
≥“F” flashes on the unit’s display for about 5 seconds when the unit
cannot go to timer recording standby.
≥Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is
turned on/off.
≥Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even when
playing.
≥Timer recordings do not begin while editing or copying in normal
speed mode (➡ 47).
≥If the unit is turned on when timer recording begins, it remains
turned on after recording finishes. It does not turn off automatically.
You can turn the unit off during timer recording.
≥If the unit is not put in the timer recording standby mode at the last
10 minutes before the programmed timer recording starting time,
the “F” flashes on the unit’s display.
≥When you programme successive timer recordings to start
immediately one after the other, the unit cannot record the part at
the beginning of the later programmes.
Programme
Programme
Not recorded
Recorded
Recorded
≥If the actual broadcasting times of timer recordings overlap, the
recording that starts first always has priority, and the recording of
the later programme will start only after the first timer recording has
finished.
RQT8388
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Check, change or delete a programme
≥Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer
Relief Recording
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the “HDD”. If
there is no disc in the tray or the disc cannot be recorded on or when
timer recording starts while copying, the recording drive will be
altered to the HDD.
recording list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].
Press [PROG/CHECK].
g
≥The Direct Navigator shows which programmes were relief-
Icons
in
F
[
W
Timer recording standby is activated.
This programme is currently recording.
The times overlap those in another programme.
Recording of the programme with the later start time
starts when the earlier programme finishes recording.
You stopped a weekly or daily timer recording. The icon
disappears the next time the timer programme starts
recording.
recorded (“ ” is displayed.) (➡ 30).
d
r
≥If the time remaining on the HDD is insufficient, as much of the
programme as possible will be recorded onto the HDD.
o
rec
e
m
i
Auto Renewal Recording
T
[HDD]
If you record a programme onto HDD repeatedly everyday or every
week using timer recording, the unit will record the new programme
over the old one.
This function can be used only when weekly recording or daily
recording is selected.
F
X
The disc was full so the programme failed to record.
The material was copy-protected so it was not
recorded.
The programme did not complete recording because
the disc is dirty or some other reason.
Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording
(➡ right column).
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD
(Displayed while recording.)
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme
and press [ENTER].
HDD Recording drive is set to HDD
DVD Recording drive is set to DVD
3 Press [2, 1] to select “RENEW”
column.
1:58 SP
12:56:00 15. 7. TUE
Timer
Remain
Date
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
Recording
4 Press [3, 4] to select “ON” and press
HDD
Start Stop DVD
Drive
Mode
No. Name
space
[ENTER].
New Timer Programme
1:58 SP
12:54:00 15. 7. TUE
Timer
Remain
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
Recording
HDD
DVD
RENEW
ON
Name
Date
SUN
Start
22:00
Stop
Mode
SP
1
ARD
22:30 HDD
Programme Name
Press ENTER to store new programme.
ENTER
RETURN
[Note]
Message displayed in the “Drive space” line
≥If a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected or
while play back is taking place from the HDD, or while copying, the
programme will not be overwritten. Instead the programme set for
recording will be saved as a separate programme, and this
programme will be the one to be overwritten when the next Auto
Renewal Recording takes place.
≥Playlists made from programmes that were set for Auto Renewal
Recording are deleted along with auto renewal.
≥When there is not enough space on the HDD, the programme may
not be recorded completely.
OK:
Displayed if the recording can fit in the
remaining space.
> (Date): For recordings made daily or weekly, the display
will show until when recordings can be made (up
to a maximum of one month from the present
time) based on the time remaining on the disc.
! :
It may not be possible to record because:
≥there is not enough space left
≥the number of possible titles has reached its
maximum.
Relief: Timer programmes that will be relief recorded to
the HDD.
∫ To change a programme
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [ENTER].
(➡ 27, step 3)
∫ To delete a programme
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [¢].
You can also delete a programme with the following steps
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [SUB MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].
∫ To exit the timer recording list
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer
recording list at 4 a.m. two days later.
RQT8388
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—
Direct Navigator
2
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
DRIVE
SELECT
REC
OPEN/CLOSE
k
1
.3
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
≥Thumbnail Display
≥Table Display
∫
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Title View
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Title View
VIDEO
PICTURE
VIDEO
PICTURE
3
1
No. Name Date Day Time Name of title
- - -
007
008
Í
Í
001
002
003
004
ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30
ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15
AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00
ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
ARD 10.10. FRI
- - -
ARD 11.10. SAT
- - -
SELECT
AV
Rec time
0:52(SP)
- - -
005 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10
006 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25
007 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30
008 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00
---
1
Numbered
PAGE
CH
2 3
1
Previous
Page 02/02
Select
Next
Page 01/01
ENTER
ENTER
Previous
S
SUB MENU
Next
Select
S
SUB MENU
RETURN
RETURN
4 5 6
buttons
ANALOGUE
8 9
CH
Switching the Direct Navigator appearance
7
G-Code
1 Press [SUB MENU] while Thumbnail Display is displayed.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Table Display” and press [ENTER].
≥The display appearance last used is saved even after the unit is
turned off.
INPUT
SELECT
0
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
6, 5
:, 9
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
3
∫
2 [HDD] [RAM]
TIME SLIP
;
Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.
/
TIME SLIP
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Title View
DIRECT
VIDEO
PICTURE
2;, ;1
NAVIGATOR,
“Top Menu”
- - -
007
008
ENTER
[HDD] To sort Title View for easy searching (Table Display only)
This function is convenient when searching for one title to
playback from many titles.
3,4,2,1
SUB MENU
RETURN
ENTER
S
RETURN
SUB MENU
CREATE
CHAPTER
AUDIO
MANUAL SKIP
MANUAL SKIP
CREATE
CHAPTER
AUDIO,
“Red”
1 Press [SUB MENU].
DISPLAY DELETE
REC
REC MODE
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [ENTER].
If you select an item other than “No.”
≥The Direct Navigator screen will reappear after playback of the
selected title has finished. (You cannot play titles continuously.)
≥Skip and Time Slip will only function with the title currently being
played back.
≥If you exit the Direct Navigator screen, or switch to “PICTURE”
Direct Navigator screen, the sorted Title View will be cancelled.
16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the
following cases.
–If you recorded to the HDD or a DVD-RAM and “Rec for High
Speed Copy” was set to “On” in the Setup menu (➡ 61).
–If you recorded or copied to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW.
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to
your television’s operating instructions.
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title and press
[ENTER].
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
You can also select titles with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
[HDD]
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
≥Turn on this unit.
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
5:
15:
115:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
[1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
5:
15:
[0] ➡ [5]
[1] ➡ [5]
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
≥It is possible to watch playback from one drive while
recording on another (editing is not possible).
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER]. (Thumbnail Display only)
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
2
If you selected the DVD drive
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.
≥Press the button again to close the tray.
≥When using 8 cm DVD-RAM, or 8 cm DVD-R, remove the
disc from the cartridge.
Direct Navigator screen icons
Insert label-up.
∫ Cartridge disc
[
Currently recording.
Title protected.
Title that was not recorded due to recording
protection (Digital broadcasts etc.)
Title cannot be played
[When copying a title to the HDD, or when data is
damaged etc.]
t
Insert label-up with
the arrow facing in.
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD
(➡ 29, Relief Recording)
Insert fully.
Automatic drive select function (➡ 22)
Title with “One time only recording” restriction
(➡ 76, CPRM)
3 Press [1] (PLAY).
Title recorded using a different encoding system
(NTSC)
(PAL)
from that of the TV system currently selected on the
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Play starts from the most recently recorded title.
[DVD-V] [DVD-A] [CD] [VCD] and MP3
Play starts from the beginning of the disc.
DivX
unit.
≥Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit
(➡ 67).
DivX Menu screen appears (➡ 34)
≥When using cartridge discs with the write-protect tab in the
protect position (➡ 55), play automatically starts when
inserted in the unit.
RQT8388
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
∫ When a menu screen appears on the television
[DVD-V] [DVD-A]
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item and press [ENTER].
Some items can also be selected using the numbered buttons.
[VCD]
Press the numbered buttons to select the item.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [5]
15:
[1] ➡ [5]
s
c
≥To return to the menu screen
[DVD-V] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] or [SUB MENU].
[DVD-A] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[VCD] Press [RETURN].
is
d
y
-onl
y
[Note]
≥It is not possible to play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc and turn it over.
≥Depending on the disc, it may take time for the menu screen, pictures, sound, etc. to start.
≥Discs continue to rotate while menus are displayed. Press [∫] when you have finished playback to protect the unit’s motor, your television screen
and so on.
pla
ng
i
y
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
≥When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you match the “TV System” setting to the recorded title (➡ 67).
/Pla
ts
n
nte
o
c
Operations during play
o
de
i
Press [∫].
Stop
v
The stopped position is memorized.
d
e
Resume play function
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.
d
r
o
c
e
Stopped position
r
≥If [∫] is pressed several times, the position is cleared.
≥The position is cleared if the tray is opened.
ing
≥[DVD-A] [CD] [VCD] and MP3/DivX :The position is cleared if the unit is turned off.
y
a
l
P
Press [;].
Pause
Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Press [6] or [5].
≥The speed increases up to 5 steps. ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] up to 3 steps)
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Search
≥Audio is heard during first level search forward.
[DVD-A] (excluding motion picture parts) [CD] and MP3 : Audio is heard during all levels of search.
DivX : Audio is not heard during all levels of search.
≥Depending on the disc, Search may not be possible.
During play or while paused, press [:] or [9].
Skip to the title, chapter or track you want to play.
≥Each press increases the number of skips.
Skip
≥DivX : Backward direction [:] only.
Press the numbered buttons.
Starting from a selected
title
Play starts from the selected title, chapter or track.
≥[HDD]
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥MP3 and JPEG/TIFF
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥[DVD-A] Selecting groups
While stopped (screen saver is displayed on the television ➡ right)
Input a 1-digit number
e.g., 5: [5]
≥Other discs (You can select a track with DVD-Audio.)
Input a 2-digit number
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [5]
15: [1] ➡ [5]
≥This works only when stopped (screen saver is displayed on the television ➡ above) with some
discs.
≥[VCD] (with playback control)
If you press the numbered buttons while stopped (the above screen saver is displayed on the
television) you can cancel PBC. (Elapsed play time appears on the unit’s display.)
Press and hold [1] (PLAY/a1.3).
Play speed is quicker than normal.
Quick View
[HDD] [RAM]
≥Press again to return to normal speed.
RQT8388
(Continued on the next page)
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs
Refer to the control reference on page 30.
Operations during play
(continued)
While paused, press [6] or [5].
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Slow-motion
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]
≥[VCD] Forward direction [5] only.
≥The unit will pause if slow-motion play is continued for approximately 5 minutes
(excluding [DVD-V] [DVD-A] [VCD]).
[DVD-A] (Motion picture parts only)
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
While paused, press [2] (2;) or [1] (;1).
Each press shows the next frame.
≥Press and hold to change in succession forward or backward.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Frame-by-frame
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]
[DVD-A] (Motion picture parts only)
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
≥[VCD] Forward direction [1] (;1) only.
1 Press [TIME SLIP].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the time
Skipping the specified
time (Time Slip)
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
-
5 min
This automatically
disappears after
approximately 5
and press [ENTER].
Play skips the specified time.
≥Each time you press [3, 4], the time
increases [3] or decreases [4] by 1 minute
intervals. (Press and hold for 10-minute
intervals.)
seconds. To show the
screen again press
[TIME SLIP] again.
Press [MANUAL SKIP].
Each time you press, play restarts approximately 30 seconds later.
Manual Skip
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Press [CREATE CHAPTER].
Chapters are divided at the point pressed.
≥Press [:, 9] to skip to the start of a chapter.
Create Chapter
(➡ 40, Title/Chapter)
[HDD] [RAM]
Changing audio during play
Press [AUDIO].
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX
LR>L>R
[DVD-V] [DVD-A]
You can change the audio channel number each time you press the
button. This allows you to change things like the soundtrack
language (➡ 38, Soundtrack).
^---------------}
HDD
PLAY
1 ENG
Î Digital 3/2.1ch
Soundtrack
e.g., English is selected.
e.g., “L R” is selected
L R
[Note]
You cannot change the audio type in the following cases.
≥When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is selected.
≥When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM” (➡ 62).
≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (➡ 24).
RQT8388
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
Regarding DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
DivX
[-R] [CD]
≥[CD] Compatible formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended
formats) and Joliet
Playable
discs
[-R] [CD]
≥This unit is compatible with multi-session but reading or play of the
disc may take time if there are a lot of sessions.
File
format
DivX
≥Files must have the
extension “.DIVX”,
“.divx”, “.AVI” or “.avi”.
≥Operation may take time to complete when there are many files
(tracks) and/or folders (groups) and some files (tracks) may not
display or be playable.
F)
F
I
T
/
≥English alphabet and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly.
G
E
Other characters may not be displayed correctly.
P
J
Number
Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300 folders
≥The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is
displayed on a computer.
of folders (including the root folder)
≥Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files
(tracks) and folders (groups) may not play in the order you
numbered them.
Maximum number of files recognizable§1: 200 files
es(
Number
of files
ur
t
≥This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.
≥Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not play.
Support
version
DivX ver.3.11, 4.x, 5.x
Video
lpic
–Number of stream: Up to 1
–Codec: DIV3, DIV4, DIVX, DV50
–Picture size: 32 x 32 to 720 x 576
–FPS (Frame Per Second): Up to 30 fps
Audio
–Number of stream: Up to 8
–Format: MP3, MPEG, AC3
–Multi channel: AC3 is possible. MPEG multi is 2 ch
conversion.
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
st
≥Compatible formats: DCF§3 compliant (Content recorded on a
digital camera, etc.)
d
n
§3Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard established
by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association (JEITA).
csa
3dis
,MP
You can play MP3 and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF) on this unit by
making folders as shown below. However depending on how
you create the disc (writing software), play may not be in the
order you numbered the folders.
GMC (Global Motion Compensation) is not supported.
cs
i
d
MP3
Playable
discs
[CD]
vX
[CD]
Root
Structure of MP3 folders
File
MP3
(folder=group)
001
Prefix with 3-digit numbers
in the order you want to play
them.
ngDi
format
≥Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.
y
a
l
(file=track)
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
Number
Maximum number of folders (groups) recognizable:
of folders 300 folders (groups)
cs/P
002 group
(groups)
(including the root folder)
is
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
004track.mp3
003 group
d
y
Maximum number of files (tracks) recognizable§1
3000 files (tracks)
:
Number
of files
(tracks)
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
onl
-
Order of play
y
a
Bit rates
32 kbps to 320 kbps
pl
[CD]
Sampling 16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1kHz/48 kHz
frequency
g
n
Root
Structures of still pictures
Files inside a folder are displayed
in the order they were updated or
taken.
yi
P0000001.jpg
P0000002.jpg
ID3 tags
not compatible
002 Folder
/Pla
≥If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within a MP3 file,
play may not be possible.
s
t
P0000003.jpg
P0000004.jpg
P0000005.jpg
n
e
Still pictures (JPEG, TIFF§2
)
≥When the highest level folders
are “DCIM” folders, they are
displayed first on the tree.
003 Folder
ont
Playable
discs and
cards
[HDD] [RAM] [CD] [SD]
P0000006.jpg
P0000007.jpg
P0000008.jpg
P0000009.jpg
004 Folder
P0000010.jpg
P0000011.jpg
P0000012.jpg
File
format
File format: JPEG, TIFF (non-compressed RGB
videoc
Order of play
d
e
chunky format)
≥Files must have the extension “.jpg”, “.JPG”, “.tif” or
“.TIF”.
d
cor
Number
of pixels
34k34 to 6144k4096
(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)
ingre
Number
of folders
[CD] Maximum number of folders recognizable:300
folders (including the root folder)
[HDD] [RAM] [SD] This unit can handle a maximum of
y
a
l
P
300 folders (including higher folders)
[CD] Maximum number of files recognizable§1:3000
files
Number
of files
[HDD] [RAM] [SD] This unit can handle a maximum of
3000 files
MOTION
JPEG
not supported
§1 Total number of recognizable file including MP3, JPEG, DivX and
other type of files is 4000.
§2 Operation may take time to complete when playing TIFF format
still pictures, or when there are many files and/or folders, some
files may not display or be playable.
RQT8388
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
Playing DivX discs
[-R] [CD]
You can play DVD-R and CD-R/CD-RW discs which contain DivX
video contents that have been recorded on a computer.
DVD
TV
Í
Í DVD
Í
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
DRIVE SELECT
PAGE
CH
2 3
1
Numbered
buttons
4 5 6
7
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
ANALOGUE
8 9
0
CH
Folder1
:
00025
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
G-Code
INPUT
SELECT
No.
001
Name of Title
Tree
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
ABC.avi
6, 5
:, 9
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
1
∫
TIME SLIP
Page
001/001
Total Title : 001
/
ENTER
RETURN
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
≥Files are treated as titles.
ENTER
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
≥When the MP3 or JPEG Menu is displayed, perform steps
1–4 in “To select file type” on the left column selecting “DivX”
in step 4 to change the playback mode.
3,4,2,1
SUB MENU
RETURN
ENTER
S
CREATE
CHAPTER
AUDIO
MANUAL SKIP
SUB MENU
“Green”
2 Press [3, 4] to select the title and
DISPLAY DELETE
REC
REC MODE
press [ENTER].
Play starts on the selected title.
≥You can also select the title with the numbered buttons.
Selecting file type to play
[CD]
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15:
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
You can play CD-R/CD-RW discs which contain MP3 files, DivX
video contents or still pictures that have been recorded on a
computer.
To stop playing
Press [∫].
The screen shown below is displayed when you insert a disc
containing DivX video contents, MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG/
TIFF).
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
e.g.,
Play mode is set to DivX.
To play another type of file,
select the file type
[Note]
≥Picture sizes set at the recording time may prevent the unit from
showing pictures in the adequate aspect. You may be able to
adjust the aspect through the TV.
≥Successive play is not possible.
≥Playback is not possible if recording is performed on the HDD
drive.
from Menu in FUNCTIONS.
≥When playing the file displayed on the screen
Press [ENTER].
≥When you want to play files other than the one displayed on the
screen
Follow the steps below.
To select file type
Using the tree screen to find a folder
1 Press [RETURN].
2 Press [FUNCTIONS].
FUNCTIONS
1 While the file list is displayed
Press [1] while a title is highlighted to display
the tree screen.
CD(DivX/MP3/JPEG)
Play Mode : DivX
Menu
Menu
F: Selected folder no./Total folder no. including DivX title.
Recording
Folder
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
Copy
F
1/21
To Others
12.02.2004
ENTER
RETURN
Image001
Image002
Image003
Image004
Image005
Image006
Image007
Image008
Image009
Image010
DATA1
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Menu” and press
You cannot select
folders that contain no
compatible files.
DATA2
[ENTER].
ENTER
RETURN
Menu
Select file type.
DivX
2 Press [3, 4] to select a folder and press
[ENTER].
MP3
The file list for the folder appears.
JPEG
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
4 Press [3, 4] to select playback mode and press
[ENTER].
If “DivX” is selected: Go to “Playing DivX discs” step 2 in the right
column.
If “MP3” is selected: Go to “Playing MP3 discs” step 2
on page 35.
If “JPEG” is selected: Go to “Playing still pictures” step 4 on page
36
RQT8388
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Regarding DivX VOD content
Playing MP3 discs
[CD]
You can play CD-R/CD-RW discs which contain MP3 files that have
been recorded on a computer.
DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content is encrypted for copyright
protection. In order to play DivX VOD content on this unit, you first
need to register the unit.
Follow the on line instructions for purchasing DivX VOD content to
enter the unit’s registration code and register the unit. For more
Preparation
F)
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
Display the unit’s registration code.
(➡ 64, “DivX Registration” in “Others” tab)
F
I
T
/
G
E
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
DivX Registration
Setup
P
J
Selected group
DivX (R) Video On Demand
No.
Group
My favorite
Menu
G
1
Total
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
:
es(
1
1
G: Group No.
Track
Tree
Tuning
T
T: Track No. in the group
TOTAL: Track No./Total
tracks in all groups
ur
001 Both Ends Freezing
TOTAL
8 alphanumeric
characters
t
Your registration code is : XXXXXXXX
002 Lady Starfish
003 Life on Jupiter
004 Metal Glue
005 Paint ItYellow
006 Pyjamamama
007 Shrimps from Mars
008 Starry Blue
1/111
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Number
0
–
9
lpic
Prev.
Next
st
8
SELECT
9
10
009 Velvet Cuppermine
010 Ziggy Starfish
d
n
Connection
Others
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
Page 001/024
RETURN
csa
≥Files are treated as tracks and folders are treated as groups.
≥After playing DivX VOD content for the first time, another
registration code is then displayed in “DivX Registration”. Do not
use this registration code to purchase DivX VOD content. If you
use this code to purchase DivX VOD content, and then play the
content on this unit, you will no longer be able to play any content
that you purchased using the previous code.
≥If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code
different from this unit’s code, you will not be able to play this
content. (“Authorization Error.” is displayed.)
≥When the DivX or JPEG Menu is displayed, perform steps 1–4 in
“To select file type” on page 34 selecting “MP3” in step 4 to change
the playback mode.
3dis
,MP
2 Press [3, 4] to select the track and
cs
i
press [ENTER].
d
Play starts on the selected track.
vX
≥“0” indicates the track currently playing.
≥You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
ngDi
15:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
y
a
l
Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of
times
Some DivX VOD content can only be played a set number of times.
When you play this content, the remaining number of plays is
displayed. You cannot play this content when the number of
remaining plays is zero. (“Rental Expired.” is displayed.)
P
To stop playing
Press [∫].
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When playing this content
≥The number of remaining plays is reduced by one if
–you press [Í DVD].
–you press [∫].
Using the tree screen to find a group
–you press [:] or [6, 5] etc. and arrive at another content
or the start of the content being played.
–timer recording starts on the HDD.
–you press [DRIVE SELECT] to change the drive.
≥Resume functions do not work.
1 While the file list is displayed
Press [1] while a track is highlighted to display
the tree screen.
Selected group No. /Total groups
If the group has no track, “– –” is displayed as group number.
Menu
Tree
G
T
8
MP3 music
001 My favorite
001 Brazilian pops
002 Chinese pops
003 Czech pops
004 Hungarian pops
005 Liner notes
006 Japanese pops
007 Mexican pops
008 Philippine pops
009 Swedish pops
001 Momoko
002 Standard number
001 Piano solo
G
7/25
14
TOTAL
40/111
Number
You cannot select groups
that contain no compatible
files.
0
–
9
SELECT
ENTER
RETURN
002 Vocal
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a group and press
[ENTER].
The file list for the group appears.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
RQT8388
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
Refer to the control reference on page 34.
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
Playing still pictures
album and press [ENTER].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View
e.g., HDD
VIDEO
PICTURE
HDD
[HDD] [RAM] [CD] [SD]
Album Name 103__DVD
0001
0002
0006
----
0003
0007
----
0004
0008
----
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB
(➡ 7).
≥You can playback still pictures recorded onto a CD-R/CD-RW on a
PC.
≥You cannot playback still pictures while recording or copying.
≥Inserting, Removing the SD card (➡ 13)
0005
0009
Page 001/001
Previous
Next
ENTER
Select
S SUB MENU
RETURN
You can also select album with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
While stopped put the card in the slot, and the menu (➡ below)
is automatically displayed.
Press [3, 4] to select “Album View” and then press [ENTER]
to display the Album View screen shown in step 2.
SD Card
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥Press [2, 1] to select the previous or next album.
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still
picture and press [ENTER].
Album View
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
Copy Video (MPEG2)
SELECT
You can also select still pictures with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
RETURN
ENTER
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
115: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
1115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥Press [2, 1] to display the previous or next still picture.
≥Useful functions during still picture play (➡ 37)
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
To return to the Album View screen or Picture (JPEG) View
screen
HDD, DVD or SD drive.
The indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
≥[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Album View
HDD
Album View screen
VIDEO
PICTURE
- - -
001
002
Recording date of the
first picture in the album/
number of pictures/
album name.
1. 1. 06 Total
Date: 1. 1.2006
5
1. 2. 06 Total
Date: 1. 2.2006
3
- - -
- - -
- - -
Page 01/01
SUB MENU
Previous
Next
ENTER
Press ENTER to show
pictures.
S
Slide Show
RETURN
Depending on the digital camera, the editing software on the
PC etc., the information about the recording date may not be
displayed. In this case, the date will appear as [--.--.--].
[HDD] [RAM] If “VIDEO” is selected, press the “Green” button to
select “PICTURE”.
≥[CD]
JPEG Menu
CD(JPEG)
Picture (JPEG) View
103__DVD
Picture (JPEG) View
screen
Folder
0001
0005
0009
0002
0003
0007
----
0004
0008
----
0006
----
Page 001/001
Previous
Next
ENTER
RETURN
(➡ Go to step 4)
When the DivX or MP3 Menu is displayed, perform steps 1–4
in “To select file type” on page 34 selecting “JPEG” in step 4 to
change the playback mode.
Direct Navigator screen icons
Picture and folder protected.
Picture in which the number of prints is set (DPOF)
(➡ 45, 76).
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
RQT8388
To select the still pictures in another folder ➡ 37
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Useful functions during still picture play
You can display still pictures one by one at a constant interval.
Start Slide Show
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
1 While the Album View screen is displayed
Slide Show Setting
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album.
2 Press [1] (PLAY).
F)
F
I
T
/
You can also start Slide Show with the following steps.
While the Album View screen is displayed
G
E
Start Slide Show
Slide Show Setting
P
J
1
2
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the desired album and press [SUB MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slide Show” and press [ENTER].
es(
[CD]
ur
t
While the Picture (JPEG) View screen is displayed
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [SUB MENU].
lpic
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slide Show” and press [ENTER].
st
≥To change the display interval
d
n
1
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Slide Show Setting” in step 2 and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Display interval”.
Press [2, 1] to select the desired interval (0–30 seconds) and press [ENTER].
csa
≥Repeat Play
1
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Slide Show Setting” in step 2 and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play”.
Press [2, 1] to select “On” or “Off” and press [ENTER].
3dis
,MP
While playing
1 Press [SUB MENU].
Rotate
cs
i
d
Rotate RIGHT
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Rotate RIGHT” or “Rotate LEFT” and
press [ENTER].
≥Rotation information will not be stored.
–[CD] Still pictures
Rotate LEFT
vX
ENTER
RETURN
ngDi
y
–When disc or album is protected
–When played on other equipment
–When copying pictures
If you remove the SD card while the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed, picture rotation information
may not be properly stored. Remove the SD card after you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.
a
l
P
≥
While playing
1 Press [SUB MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom in” and press [ENTER].
≥To return the picture to its original size, press [3, 4] to select “Zoom out” in step 2 and
press [ENTER].
Zoom in
Zoom out
Rotate RIGHT
Rotate LEFT
Zoom in
ENTER
RETURN
≥When zooming in, the picture may be cut off.
≥The enlargement information will not be stored.
≥The “Zoom in/Zoom out” function is only available for still pictures smaller than
640 a 480 pixels.
While playing
Properties
Press [ ] twice.
18:53:50 11.10.
Folder - Picture No. 103 - 0006
Date
1. 1. 2005
No.
3 / 9
Shooting date
To exit the picture properties screen
Press [ ].
∫ To select the still pictures in another folder
(➡ 7, Structure of folders displayed by this unit)
[RAM] [SD]
[CD]
To switch to another higher folder
1 While the Picture (JPEG) View screen is displayed
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [ENTER].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [ENTER].
(Only if there is a multiple number of higher folders recognizable)
1 While the Album View screen is displayed
Press [SUB MENU].
JPEG Menu
CD(JPEG)
JPEG Menu
CD(JPEG)
Picture (JPEG) View
Folder
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Select Folder” and press [ENTER].
Folder
103__DVD
F
1/3
0001
----
----
0002
----
----
0003
----
0004
----
021216_0026
103_DVD
Select Folder
104_DVD
105_DVD
Select folder to access.
\DCIM
----
----
Press ENTER to set.
SELECT
Page 001/001
Previous
Next
ENTER
RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
ENTER
S SUB MENU
RETURN
RQT8388
3 Press [2, 1] to select the higher folder and press [ENTER].
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using on-screen menus/Status message
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
STILL-P (Still picture) [DVD-A]
Selects the play method for still pictures.
Slide Show: Plays according to the default order on the disc.
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
Page:
Select the still picture number and play.
TIME SLIP
≥RANDOM: Plays in random order.
/
≥Return:
Returns to the default still picture on the disc.
Source Select (DivX)
ENTER
3,4,2,1
ENTER
≥Automatic: The constructing method of the DivX contents
is automatically distinguished and output.
≥Interlace: Select when the disc contents were recorded
using interlace.
SUB MENU
RETURN
S
CREATE
CHAPTER
AUDIO
MANUAL SKIP
DISPLAY DELETE
REC
REC MODE
≥Progressive: Select when the disc contents were recorded
using progressive.
DISPLAY
PBC (Playback control ➡ 77) [VCD]
Using on-screen menus
Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.
§ With some discs, you may only be able to make changes using the
menus (➡ 31) on the disc.
Common procedures
≥The display changes according to the disc content. You cannot
change when there is no recording.
1 Press [DISPLAY].
Audio attribute
LPCM/PPCM/ÎDigital/DTS/MPEG:
k (kHz):
b (bit):
Disc
Î Digital 2/0 ch
1
Soundtrack
Subtitle
Signal type
Sampling frequency
Number of bits
Play
Off
Picture
Sound
Other
L R
Audio channel
ch (channel):
Number of channels
Language
Menu
Item
Setting
ENG: English
FRA: French
DEU: German
ITA: Italian
ESP: Spanish
NLD: Dutch
SVE: Swedish
NOR: Norwegian
DAN: Danish
POR: Portuguese
RUS: Russian
JPN: Japanese
CHI: Chinese
KOR: Korean
MAL: Malay
VIE: Vietnamese
THA: Thai
≥Depending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped,
etc.) and disc contents, there are some items that you
cannot select or change.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and
¢:
Others
press [1].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and
Play menu—Change the play sequence
press [1].
This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed.
Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items that
can be selected will differ.
4 Press [3, 4] to select the setting.
≥Some items can be changed by pressing [ENTER].
Repeat Play
≥All
≥Chapter
[CD][VCD]
To clear the on-screen menus
Press [DISPLAY].
[HDD] [RAM] [-R][-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Group
≥PL (Playlist)
≥Title
[DVD-A] and MP3
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[DVD-A] [CD][VCD] and MP3
Disc menu—Setting the disc content
Soundtrack§
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
The disc’s audio attributes appear.
≥Track
Select “Off” to cancel.
[DVD-V] [DVD-A]
Select the audio and language (➡ right, Audio attribute,
Language).
DivX
Picture menu—Change the picture quality
Select the soundtrack number.
≥Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only one
audio type.
Playback NR
Reduces noise and picture degradation.
Progressive§ (➡ 77)
Subtitle§
[DVD-V] [DVD-A]
Select “On” to enable progressive output.
Select “Off” if the picture is stretched horizontally.
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (➡ right,
Language).
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] (Only
discs that contain subtitle on/off information)
Turn the subtitle on/off.
≥Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.
DivX
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the subtitle number.
≥Subtitle numbers are displayed even if there are not multiple
subtitles.
Angle§ [DVD-V] [DVD-A]
Change the number to select an angle.
Audio channel [HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX
➡ 32, Changing audio during play
RQT8388
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transfer§ [When “Progressive” (➡ 38) is set to “On”.]
Status messages
Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit
the type of title being played (➡ 76, Film and video).
During playback or recording
Press [ ].
When the output signal is PAL
(When the tray is opened, the setting will return to “Auto”.)
The display changes each time you press the button.
e
≥Auto:
≥Video:
≥Film:
Automatically detects the film and video
content, and appropriately converts it.
Select when using “Auto”, and the content is
distorted.
Select this if the edges of
the film content appear
Selected drive/type of disc
HDD
g
a
The remaining time appears here while
REC
PLAY
stopped.
Recording or play status/input channel
STEREO
L R
TV audio type being received (➡ below)
Selected audio type
mes
s
u
t
DVD REC
Recording drive/Copy progress indicator
a
jagged or rough when
“Auto” is selected.
However, if the video
content is distorted as
/St
s
u
n
Title number and elapsed time during play/
shown in the illustration to the right, then select
“Auto”.
me
Recording mode
Available recording time and
recording mode
en
Date and time
When the output signal is NTSC
re
c
s
-
≥Auto1
(normal):
≥Auto2:
Automatically detects the film and video
π
Remain
18:53:50 11.10.
13:50 XP
n
content, and appropriately converts it.
In addition to “Auto1”, automatically detects
film contents with different frame rates and
appropriately converts it.
Select when using “Auto1” and “Auto2”, and
the content is distorted.
π T1 0:05.14 XP
π T2 0:00.10 XP
o
g
in
s
U
Title number and elapsed time during
recording/Recording mode
≥Video:
No display
AV-in NR (Only when AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4 or DV is selected)
Reduces video tape noise while copying.
≥TV audio type
STEREO:STEREO stereo broadcast
M 1/M 2: Bilingual dual-sound broadcast
M 1: Monaural broadcast
≥Automatic: Noise reduction only works on picture input from
a video tape.
≥On:
Noise reduction works for input video.
Noise reduction is off. You can record the input
signal as it is.
≥Off:
§ Only when you have set “Progressive” to “On” in the Setup menu
(➡ 19).
Sound menu—Change the sound effect
DVB Multi Audio
[Digital channel (MPEG Audio) only]
If more than one audio channel is output, you can set the
desired channel before recording.
≥DVB Multi Audio cannot be selected during playback or
recording.
≥Depending on the broadcast, the items that can be selected
will differ.
≥English ≥German ≥French
≥Italian
≥Spanish ≥Other
V.S.S.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R][-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [DVD-A]
[-RW‹VR›]
(Dolby Digital, MPEG, 2-channel or over only)
Enjoy a surround-like effect if you are using two front speakers
only.
≥Turn V.S.S. off if it causes distortion. (Check the surround
function on the connected equipment.)
≥V.S.S. does not work for bilingual recordings.
Dialog Enhancer
[HDD] [RAM] [-R][-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [DVD-A]
[-RW‹VR›] and DivX
(Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a centre channel)
The volume of the centre channel is raised to make dialogue
easier to hear.
Other menu—Change the display position
Position
1–5: The higher the setting the lower the on-screen menu
moves.
RQT8388
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing titles/chapters
TV
Í
Í
1
2
During play or while stopped
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
DRIVE SELECT
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[HDD] [RAM]
PAGE
CH
2 3
1
4 5 6
7
Press the “Red” button to select
“VIDEO”.
ANALOGUE
8 9
0
CH
G-Code
INPUT
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Title View
VIDEO PICTURE
:, 9
;
1
Title View screen
HDD
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
- - -
007
008
TIME SLIP
ARD 10.10. FRI
- - -
ARD 11.10. SAT
- - -
/
- - -
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
ENTER
Previous
ENTER
Next
Page 02/02
3,4,2,1
ENTER
Select Previous
S
Next
SUB MENU
ENTER
SUB MENU
RETURN
S
RETURN
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and
press [ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
SUB MENU
“Red”
CREATE
CHAPTER
AUDIO
MANUAL SKIP
DISPLAY DELETE
REC
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
(You cannot edit finalized discs.)
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
Title/Chapter
Programmes are recorded as a single title consisting of one
chapter.
4
5
Press [SUB MENU].
Title
Chapter
Press [3,
4] to select the operation
and press [ENTER].
Start
End
≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and
press [ENTER]. (➡ 41)
[HDD] [RAM] You can divide a title into multiple chapters. Each
section between the division points becomes a chapter.
(➡ 32, 41, Create Chapter)
Enter Name
Set up Protection
Title
Cancel Protection
Refer to “Title
operations”
(➡ 41).
Partial Delete
Change Thumbnail
Divide Title
Delete
Properties
Edit
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter View
Table Display
Album View
[HDD] [RAM] You can change the order of chapters and create a
Switching the Direct Navigator
appearance ➡ 30
playlist (➡ 42).
≥The maximum number of items on a disc:
[HDD]
Playing still pictures ➡ 36, step 3
–Titles:
–Chapters: Approx. 1000 per title
(Depends on the state of recording.)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
500
∫ If you select “Chapter View”
6
Press [
3
,
4
,
2
,
1] to select the chapter.
–Titles:
99 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] 49 titles)
To start play ➡ Press [ENTER].
–Chapters:
Approx. 1000 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Approx. 250)
(Depends on the state of recording.)
To edit ➡ Step 7.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Chapter View
HDD
Chapter View screen
VIDEO
PICTURE
[Note]
008 ARD 11.10. SAT
≥Once deleted, divided or partially deleted, recorded content cannot
be restored to its original state. Make certain before proceeding.
≥You cannot edit during recording or copying, etc.
≥Restricted recording information remains even after editing (e.g.
dividing a title etc).
001
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
0:31.24
---
---
---
≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (➡ above)
≥[+R] [+R]DL] Each time you edit a title the information is saved to the
free space on the disc. If you do this numerous times, the amount
of free space decreases.
7
Press [SUB MENU], then [
select the operation and press [ENTER].
3
,
4] to
We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc.
Delete Chapter
Create Chapter
Refer to “Chapter
operations” (➡ 41).
Editing titles/chapters and playing
chapters
Combine Chapters
Title View
You can modify (remove unnecessary parts, divide, etc.) recorded
programmes.
Preparation
≥You can go back to Title View.
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connection to this unit.
≥Turn the unit on.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded
title to be edited.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ 55).
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT8388
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Title operations
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ 40)
Delete§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥The available recording space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL does not increase when you delete titles.
≥Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only when the last recorded
title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
s
er
t
Information (e.g., time and date) is shown.
≥Press [ENTER] to exit the screen.
Properties
Properties
p
a
Dinosaur
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
h
No.
026
Time
12:19
c
/
Date 11.10.2006 MON Rec time 0:30 (SP)
Name ARD
es
l
t
i
You can give names to recorded titles.
➡ 58, Entering text
Enter Name
t
g
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
in
it
Set up Protection§
If set, this will protect the title from accidental deletion.
Ed
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Title V
HDD
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
The lock symbol appears when the title is protected.
Cancel Protection§
007
008
[HDD] [RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
ARD 10.10. FRI
ARD 11.10.
You can remove unnecessary part of the recording.
1Press [ENTER] at the start point and end point of the
section you want to delete.
2Press [3, 4] to select “Exit” and press [ENTER].
≥Press [3, 4] to select “Next” and press [ENTER] to delete other
sections.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete
HDD
Partial Delete
VIDEO
PICTURE
[HDD] [RAM]
008
PLAY
Start
End
Next
Exit
(➡ below, For your reference)
0:43.21
Start
End
- -:- -.- -
- -:- -.- -
ENTER
RETURN
3Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].
You can change an image to be shown as the thumbnail picture in the Title
View.
1Press [1] (PLAY) to start play.
2Press [ENTER] when the image you want to use as a
Change Thumbnail
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Change Thumbnail
HDD
VIDEO
PICTURE
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
;
008
Change
(➡ below, For your reference)
Exit
0:00.00
thumbnail is shown.
To change the thumbnail
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Change”, then press [ENTER]
at the point you want to change.
Start play and select the image
of a thumbnail.
Change
- -:- -.- -
ENTER
3Press [3, 4] to select “Exit” and press [ENTER].
You can divide a title into two.
Divide Title
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Divide Title
VIDEO
PICTURE
1Press [ENTER] at the point you want to divide the title.
2Press [3, 4] to select “Exit” and press [ENTER].
3Press [2, 1] to select “Divide” and press [ENTER].
[HDD] [RAM]
008
PLAY
Preview
(➡ below, For your reference)
Divide
Exit
0:43.21
To confirm the division point
Divide
- -:- -.- -
Press [3, 4] to select “Preview” and press [ENTER]. (The unit plays 10
seconds before and after the division point.)
To change the division point
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Divide”, then press [ENTER] at the point where you want to divide
the title.
[Note]
≥The divided titles retain the title name and CPRM property (➡ 76) of the original title.
≥Video and audio just before and after the dividing point may momentarily cut out.
§ Multiple editing is possible.
Chapter operations
After performing steps 1–7 (➡ 40)
Delete Chapter§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥Select “Combine Chapters” (➡ below) when you only want to delete the division point between chapters.
(The recorded contents will not be deleted.)
[HDD] [RAM]
Select the point where you want to start a new chapter while viewing the
title.
1Press [ENTER] at the point you want to divide.
≥Repeat this step to divide at other points.
2Press [3, 4] to select “Exit” and press [ENTER].
Create Chapter
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Create Chapter
HDD
VIDEO
PICTURE
[HDD] [RAM]
008
PLAY
Create
(➡ below, For your reference)
Exit
0:43.21
Press [2, 1] to select “Combine” and press [ENTER].
≥The selected chapter and following chapter are combined.
Combine Chapters
[HDD] [RAM]
§ Multiple editing is possible.
For your reference
≥Use search (➡ 31), Time Slip (➡ 32) to find the desired point.
≥To find the desired point correctly, use Slow-motion (➡ 32) and Frame-by-frame (➡ 32).
≥To skip to the start or end of a title, press [:] (start) or [9] (end).
RQT8388
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating, editing and playing playlists
DVD
TV
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
Í
Í
VOLUME
CH
press [ENTER].
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
DRIVE SELECT
PAGE
CH
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Create”
2 3
4 5 6
1
and press [ENTER].
ANALOGUE
Playlists
HDD
- -
Playlist View
8 9
CH
7
- -
- -
G-Code
INPUT
SELECT
0
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
Create
- -
- -
- -
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
TIME SLIP
5 Press [2, 1] to select the source title
/
and press [4].
≥Press [ENTER] to select all the chapters in the title, then
skip to step 7.
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
ENTER
3,4,2,1
ENTER
Create
Playlists
HDD
SUB MENU
RETURN
S
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
SUB MENU
CREATE
CHAPTER
Source Title
001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
AUDIO
MANUAL SKIP
002
002
---
---
Source Chapter
001
003
---
---
Chapters in Playlist
---
You can arrange the chapters (➡ 40) to create a playlist.
---
---
Title
Title
ENTER
S
SUB MENU
Press RETURN to exit.
RETURN
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
6 Press [2, 1] to select the chapter you
want to add to a playlist and press
Playlist
Chapter
Chapter
[ENTER].
Press [3] to cancel.
Create
Playlists
HDD
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
Copying (➡ 47) a playlist will create a title.
Source Title
001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
002
002
---
---
≥Playlists are not recorded separately so this doesn’t use much
capacity.
≥Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles
and source chapters.
≥You cannot create or edit playlists while recording or copying.
Source Chapter
001
003
---
---
Chapters in Playlist
---
---
---
ENTER
S
SUB MENU
Press RETURN to exit.
RETURN
[HDD] [RAM]
≥You can also create a new chapter from the source title.
Press [SUB MENU] to select “Create Chapter” and press
[ENTER] (➡ 41, Create Chapter)
≥The maximum number of items on a disc:
–Playlists:
99
–Chapters in playlists: Approx. 1000
(Depends on the state of recording.)
7 Press [2, 1] to select the position to
≥If you exceed the maximum numbers of items for a disc, all the
items entered will not be recorded.
insert the chapter and press [ENTER].
Playlists
HDD
Create
Creating playlists
[HDD] [RAM]
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
Source Title
001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
002
002
---
---
Source Chapter
001
Preparation
003
---
---
---
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate Video input to suit
the connection to this unit.
Chapters in Playlist
---
---
≥Turn the unit on.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded
title to be edited.
≥[RAM] Release disc or cartridge protection (➡ 55).
≥You cannot create or edit a playlist while recording or while
copying.
≥Playlists must be made in accordance with the encoding system
currently selected in “TV System” (➡ 67).
ENTER
Press RETURN to exit.
RETURN
≥Press [3] to select other source titles.
≥Repeat steps 6–7 to add other chapters.
8 Press [RETURN].
All the selected scenes become the playlist.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
To exit the screen
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
Press [RETURN] several times.
and press [ENTER].
FUNCTIONS
HDD
Remain 30:00 SP
G-Code Record
Playback
Recording
Advanced Copy
Playlists
Delete
Flexible Rec
DV Auto Rec
Copy
To Others
Setup
ENTER
RETURN
HDD Management
RQT8388
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing and playing playlists/chapters
[HDD] [RAM]
Playlist operations
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ left)
[-RW‹VR›] (Play only)
Delete§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press
[ENTER].
Once deleted, the playlists are lost and
cannot be restored.
Make certain before proceeding.
1
While stopped
[HDD] [RAM]
Press [FUNCTIONS].
s
t
s
i
l
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
y
Playlist information (e.g., total time and date)
is shown.
≥Press [ENTER] to exit the screen.
and press [ENTER].
Properties
[HDD] [RAM]
[-RW‹VR›]
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
ingpla
Properties
press [ENTER].
y
Dinosaur
No.
10
Date 12.10.2006 TUE
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
Chapters 002 Total 0:30.53
ndpla
playlist.
RETURN
ENTER
To start play ➡ Press [ENTER].
To edit ➡ Step 5.
➡ 42, Creating playlists, Step 5–8
Create
tinga
d
Playlists
HDD
01
Playlist View
- -
Playlist View screen
[HDD] [RAM]
- -
Copy§
[HDD] [RAM]
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and press
[ENTER].
≥The copied playlist becomes the newest
one in the playlist view screen.
12.10. SUN 0:30
- -
Create
- -
ting,e
- -
a
e
≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (➡ 40)
Cr
5 Press [SUB MENU], then [3, 4] to
You can give names to playlists.
➡ 58, Entering text
Enter
Name
[HDD] [RAM]
select the operation and press
[ENTER].
≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and
press [ENTER].
➡ 41, Change Thumbnail
Change
Thumbnail
Create
[HDD] [RAM]
Copy
Refer to “Playlist
operations”.
Enter Name
Delete
§ Multiple editing is possible.
Change Thumbnail
Properties
Edit
Chapter operations
Chapter View
[HDD] [RAM]
After performing steps 1–7 (➡ left)
≥Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles and
source chapters.
∫ If you select “Chapter View”
➡ 42, Creating playlists, Step 5–7
Add
Chapter
6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
chapter.
To start play ➡ Press [ENTER].
To edit ➡ Step 7.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the position
to insert the chapter and press [ENTER].
Move
Chapter
Playlists
HDD
Chapter View
Chapter View screen
Playlists
HDD
Move Chapter
01 ARD 12.10. SUN 0:30
01 12.10. SUN 0:11
002
001
002
---
---
---
---
---
---
001
---
---
---
---
---
---
0:10.24
0:19.36
0:10.24
0:19.36
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (➡ 40)
Previous
Page 01/01
Next
ENTER
RETURN
7 Press [SUB MENU], then [3, 4] to
select the operation and press
[ENTER].
➡ 41, Create Chapter
Create
Chapter
Add Chapter
➡ 41, Combine Chapters
Move Chapter
Combine
Chapters
Refer to “Chapter
operations”.
Create Chapter
Combine Chapters
Delete Chapter
➡ 41, Delete Chapter
The playlist itself is deleted if you delete all
the chapters in it.
Delete
Playlist View
Chapter§
≥You can go back to Playlist View.
§ Multiple editing is possible.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
RQT8388
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing still pictures
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
2
[HDD] [RAM]
Press the “Green” button to select
“PICTURE”.
DVD
TV
Í
Í
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
3
Editing an album:
DRIVE SELECT
PAGE
CH
Select the album to be edited and press
2 3
1
[SUB MENU].
4 5 6
≥When you want to create an album using “Create Album”,
press [SUB MENU] without selecting album.
ANALOGUE
8 9
CH
7
G-Code
INPUT
SELECT
0
Editing a still picture:
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
:, 9
1 Select the album which contains the still
picture to edit and press [ENTER].
2 Select the still pictures to edit and press
[SUB MENU].
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
;
TIME SLIP
/
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and
press [ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
ENTER
3,4,2,1
ENTER
SUB MENU
RETURN
S
RETURN
SUB MENU
“Green”
CREATE
CHAPTER
AUDIO
MANUAL SKIP
DISPLAY DELETE
REC
REC MODE
≥To switch to another higher folder (➡ 37)
4 Press [3, 4] to select the operation
and press [ENTER].
∫To edit the album
(e.g., [SD])
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
Useful functions during still picture
play (➡ 37)
≥You can edit pictures and albums.
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB
(➡ 7).
Start Slide Show
Slide Show Setting
Add Pictures
≥You cannot edit still pictures recorded on CD-R/CD-RW.
Enter Album Name
Create Album
Delete Album
Preparation
Edit Album
Set up Protection
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.
≥[RAM] [SD] Release protection (➡ 55, Setting the protection).
Cancel Protection
Select Folder
Album and picture operation (➡ 45)
[RAM] [SD]
This is only displayed when there are other higher
folders that can be viewed.
To switch to another higher folder (➡ 37)
∫To edit still picture
(e.g., [SD])
Delete Picture
Set up Protection
Album and picture operation
(➡ 45)
Cancel Protection
DPOF
You can go back to Album View.
Album View
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT8388
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Album and picture operation
After performing steps 1–4, page 44
Delete Picture§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before
proceeding.
Delete Album§
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
s
e
≥When deleting an album, files other than the still picture files inside the album will also be deleted. (This
does not apply to folders under the album concerned.)
ur
t
You can give names to albums.
Enter Album Name
➡ 58, Entering text
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
≥Album names input using this unit may not be displayed on other equipment.
lpic
i
t
Set up Protection§
Cancel Protection§
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
If set, this will protect the still picture or album from accidental deletion.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
SD CARD
Pic
103__
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
ings
Album Name
t
i
The lock symbol appears when the still picture or album is protected.
≥Even if the protection setting is used by this unit to protect an album, the album
may be deleted by another unit.
0001
0002
0006
Ed
0005
DPOF§
[SD]
You can select individual pictures for printing and specify the number of prints to be made.
DPOF
Press [2, 1] to select number of print (0 to 9) and
press [ENTER].
Set up DPOF on the picture (JPEG).
Setting on other equipment will be cancelled.
Number of prints
1
The DPOF mark appears.
To cancel the print setting
Set the number of print to “0”.
≥Print settings (DPOF) made using this unit may not be viewable on other equipment.
≥When this is set by this unit, any settings established by other units will be released.
≥Settings cannot be made for files not in accordance with DCF standards or if there is no remaining space
on the card.
1Press [2, 1] to select “Start” or “Yes” and press [ENTER].
Add Pictures
Create Album
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
2
3
4
e.g.,
Create Album
HDD
Step
1
Please select album to copy.
- - -
007
008
12. 5.06 Total 24
100_DVD
- - -
12. 6.06 Total 3
101_DVD
- - -
- - -
Previous
Page 02/02
Next
ENTER
Previous
Next
RETURN
2Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album that contains the still picture you want
to add and press [ENTER].
Create Album
e.g.,
Copy all the pictures in the selected album?
Copy Pictures
Copy Album
SELECT
RETURN
ENTER
[RAM] [SD]
To switch to another higher folder
1 Press [SUB MENU].
2 Select “Select Folder” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [2, 1] to select the higher folder and press [ENTER].
3Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [ENTER].
≥If “Copy Pictures” is selected
Select the still picture you want to add and press [ENTER].
≥If “Copy Album” is selected
All the still pictures in the album will be copied.
4Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No” and press [ENTER].
≥If you want to continue copying, select “Yes” and go to step ➁.
Only for “Create Album”
5Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No” and press [ENTER].
≥If “Yes” is selected:
You can give names to albums. (➡ 58, Entering text)
≥If “No” is selected:
The recording date of the first picture in the album becomes the album name. (If there is no recording
date information, the date will appear as [--.--.----].)
Press [2] to select “Start” and press [ENTER].
You cannot copy if multiple albums are selected.
Copy to DVD-RAM
[HDD]
Copy to HDD
[RAM]
§ Multiple editing is possible.
[Note]
≥Timer recordings do not start when performing “Add Pictures”, “Create Album”, “Copy to DVD-RAM” or “Copy to HDD”.
≥You cannot perform “Add Pictures” or “Create Album” to a higher folder.
RQT8388
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Delete Navigator
Using the DELETE Navigator to delete
1
While stopped
DVD
TV
Í
Í
Press [FUNCTIONS].
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and
PAGE
CH
press [ENTER].
2 3
4 5 6
1
DELETE Navigator
HDD
Title View
VIDEO
PICTURE
- - -
ANALOGUE
007
008
8 9
CH
7
ARD 10.10. FRI
- - -
ARD 11.10. SAT
- - -
G-Code
INPUT
SELECT
0
- - -
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
:, 9
Previous
Page 02/02
Select
Next
ENTER
S
SUB MENU
Previous
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
Next
STOP
RETURN
;
TIME SLIP
[HDD] [RAM] To switch to the other view
/
Press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”.
Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
ENTER
3,4,2,1
ENTER
3
If you want to delete a title:
SUB MENU
RETURN
S
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title
and press [ENTER].
CREATE
CHAPTER
AUDIO
MANUAL SKIP
“Red”
DISPLAY DELETE
REC
REC MODE
DELETE
“Green”
If you want to delete an album:
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
album and press [DELETE].
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [SD]
(You cannot delete items on finalized discs.)
≥A title or a picture cannot be restored once it is deleted. Make
certain before proceeding.
If you want to delete a still picture:
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album
that contains the still picture you want to
delete and press [ENTER].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still
picture and press [ENTER].
≥You cannot delete while recording or copying.
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.
≥[RAM] [SD] Release protection (➡ 55, Setting the protection).
You can confirm the titles or pictures etc. that you have
selected using the sub menu.
∫ Available disc space after deleting
≥Refer to sub menu operations for the “Title View” (➡ 40, step
5).
≥Refer to sub menu operations for the “Album View” (➡ 44,
≥[HDD] [RAM] [SD] If you delete a recorded title (or a still picture),
the space deleted becomes available for recording.
step 4).
Available disc space increases after
deleting any of these titles or still
pictures
≥Refer to sub menu operations for the “Picture (JPEG) View”
(➡ 44, step 4).
To show other pages
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Available
disc space
......
Last title
recorded
Title
Title
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
≥[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available recording space increases only when the
last recorded title is deleted.
4 Press [2] to select “Delete” and press
Available disc space does
Available disc space
[ENTER].
not increase even after
increases after deleting
The title, album or the picture is deleted.
deleting
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
Last title
recorded
Available
disc space
......
Title
Title
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available space does not increase even
after the contents are deleted.
Deleting titles or pictures during play
1
While playing
Press [DELETE].
You cannot delete a picture during a Slide Show.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
press [ENTER].
The title or the picture is deleted.
RQT8388
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles or playlists
Copy
Advanced Copy
Easy copying from HDD to DVD with no difficult Make a copy list and then copy.
Features
You can set the unit to copy titles or playlists in the
settings.
way you want.
HDD ➝ DVD
Y
t
Y
Y
Copy direction
DVD ➝ HDD
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [+RW]
[DVD-V] (Only from a finalized disc)
s
t
Y
s
i
l
[DVD-V] You cannot perform high-speed copy with
finalized discs.
[+RW] You cannot perform high-speed copy from
+RW to HDD.
y
High speed mode copy§1
Y
t
pla
or
Y§2
Changing recording mode
Finalize§3
s
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Can be selected
Automatically finalized
High speed mode
Normal speed mode
High speed mode
Normal speed mode
ngitle
y
Copying MPEG2 moving pictures
from an SD card (➡ 51)
Y
t
t
t
[HDD] [RAM] only
Copying playlists§4
Cop
t
Y
Y
t
t
t§5
t§6
t
Y
Y
t§5
t§6
t
/
Are chapters maintained?
Are thumbnails maintained?
Recording and Playing while Copying
Y
tor
Y§7
Y§8
ga
i
v
§1
To high speed copy titles (or playlists created from those titles), set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD (➡ 24).
However in the following cases, copying to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using the high speed mode does not work.
≥Playlists created from titles using a variety of recording modes
Na
te
le
≥Playlists created from multiple titles using FR recording mode
De
≥Playlists mixed with a variety of audio types (Dolby Digital and LPCM, etc.)
≥Titles that contain many deleted segments
≥MPEG2 moving picture titles copied to the HDD from an SD card
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode. (Displayed
)
§2 If you select a recording mode with better picture quality than the original, the picture quality does not improve. (However it does prevent
against degradation of picture quality.)
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in EP mode.
§3 You cannot select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select”.
If you want to set auto-play select or the background colour, select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select” in “DVD Management” before copying (
➡
57).
§4 You cannot copy playlists with a play time more than 8 hours.
When you copy a playlist, it will become a title in the destination drive.
§5 [RAM] [-R]DL] [+R]DL] [+RW] : One title becomes one chapter.
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] : Chapters are created automatically ([-R] [-RW‹V›] about 5-minutes [+R] about 8-minutes) when finalizing after copying the disc.
§6 Thumbnails return to the default position.
§7 When copying playlists, the thumbnails may not reflect changes made to them.
§8 Possible only with titles on the HDD
(However it is not possible when copying with automatic finalization or when copying MPEG2 moving pictures from an SD card.)
–You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying.
–You cannot play a playlist while copying titles with “One time only recording” restriction (➡ 8).
–Still pictures cannot be played.
∫ Approximate copying times (Max. speed)
(excludes time required to write data management information)
5X Speed
DVD-RAM
16X Speed
DVD-R
4X Speed§1
DVD-RW
8X Speed§2
+R
4X Speed
+RW
4X Speed
2.4X Speed
+R DL
HDD
Rec
mode time
XP
SP
DVD-R DL
Rec
Required
Required
time
Required
time
15 min.
Required
time
Required
time
Required
time
Required
time
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
time
12 min.
6 min.
3 min.
2 min.
5
x
6 min.
10
x
x
x
x
x
4
8
x
x
15 min.
4
8
x
x
8 min. 35 s.
7
x
25 min. 2.4
12 min. 30 s. 4.8
6 min. 15 s. 7.2
x
x
x
15 min.
7 min. 30 s.
3 min. 45 s. 16x
4
8
x
x
1
10
20
30
x
x
x
x
2 min. 25 s. 25
1 min. 15 s. 48
52 sec. 69
42 sec. 86
7 min. 30 s.
7 min. 30 s.
4 min. 10 s. 14
2 min. 25 s. 25
x
x
LP
1 hour
3 min. 45 s. 16
2 min. 30 s. 24
1 min. 53 s. 32
x
x
x
3 min. 45 s. 16
2 min. 30 s. 24
1 min. 53 s. 32
x
x
x
EP (6H)
EP (8H)
1 min. 30 s. 40
≥The above values indicate the quickest possible times and speeds to high speed copy a one hour title recorded on the HDD to a high speed
recording compatible disc. Depending on what part of the disc is being written to, the features of the disc, etc., the times and speeds will vary.
§1 In this unit, copying with a 6X Speed DVD-RW disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 4X Speed DVD-RW disc.
§2 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed +R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 8X Speed +R disc.
[Note]
≥When recording or playing while copying, the unit may not use the maximum recording speed.
≥Depending on the condition of the disc, the unit may not copy using the maximum speed.
Regarding copying to DVD-R DL (single-sided, Dual Layer)
and +R DL (single-sided, Double Layer)
When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily
copied at normal speed to the HDD and then copied at high speed
to DVD-R DL and +R DL. The titles that were temporarily copied to
the HDD are then deleted.
Regarding copying of digital broadcasts that allow “One time
only recording”
You can copy a recorded title to a CPRM (➡ 76) compatible DVD-
RAM, however, the title is deleted from the HDD.
≥Titles or playlists cannot be copied from DVD-RAM to the HDD.
≥Titles will not be copied if they are protected (➡ 41).
You cannot copy to DVD-R DL and +R DL in the following cases.
–When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When
copying to a new blank disc, if you intend to fill a new disc when
copying to it, the equivalent of up to 4 hours of free space in SP
mode is needed on the HDD.)
≥
You cannot copy playlists created from “One time only recording” titles.
≥Titles with recording limitations and playlists cannot be registered
on the same copying list.
–When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the number of titles
to be copied to the DVD-R DL and +R DL is greater than 500 in total.
When playing a title recorded on both layers, video and audio may
momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers. (➡ 5)
RQT8388
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles or playlists
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and
press [ENTER].
DVD
TV
COPY Navigator
HDD
Destination Capacity: 4310MB
Total
:
0
Size:
0MB( 0%)
Í
No. Name Date Day Time Name of title
Í
001
002
003
004
ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30
ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15
AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00
ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
Rec time
0:52(SP)
005 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10
006 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25
007 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30
008 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00
---
PAGE
CH
2 3
1
Numbered
buttons
Page 01/01
Select
ENTER
4 5 6
S
SUB MENU
RETURN
ANALOGUE
8 9
CH
7
G-Code
INPUT
3 Press [3, 4] to select the title you
SELECT
0
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
want to copy and press [ENTER].
:, 9
;
1
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
To show other pages
∫
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.
TIME SLIP
/
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
Press [ENTER] to register.
≥A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
ENTER
3,4,2,1
ENTER
SUB MENU
RETURN
S
SUB MENU
“Red”
4
After you start copying DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-
CREATE
CHAPTER
AUDIO
MANUAL SKIP
Video format), +R and +R DL discs, they become play-
only and you can no longer record or edit.
DISPLAY DELETE
REC
REC MODE
“Green”
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [ENTER].
Before copying
Copy starts.
When copying a title with main and secondary audio
≥Select the audio type for recording bilingual broadcast from
“Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ 62) when:
–Copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL and +RW.
–When “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM” (➡ 62)
and you are copying in XP mode.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫ To stop copying ➡ 50
∫ COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and
Copying 16:9 aspect titles
The titles are copied in 4:3 aspect if you copy to a DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW.
functions ➡ 50
[Note]
∫ To check the properties of a title and sort COPY
Navigator
1 Press [3, 4] to select the title and press
[SUB MENU].
Titles and playlists recorded using a different encoding system (PAL
or NTSC) from the TV system currently selected on the unit cannot
be copied.
Preparation
COPY Navigator
HDD
Destination Capacity: 4310MB
Size: 0MB( 0%)
No. Name Date Day Time Name of title
≥Insert a disc that you can use for copying (➡ 4, 5).
≥Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.
Total
:
0
001
002
003
004
ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30
ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15
AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00
ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05
Copy
Rec time
0:52(SP)
005 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10
006 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25
007 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30
008 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00
---
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL
are automatically finalized (➡ 76). After finalizing, the discs
become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD
equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.
Page 01/01
Properties
Sort
ENTER
RETURN
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” or “Sort”
and press [ENTER].
Properties:
[HDD]
>
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(You cannot copy to finalized discs.)
The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected title are
shown.
∫ Speed and recording mode when copying
[HDD] > [RAM] : High speed
Sort:
[HDD]
>
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : Refer to the following table.
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [ENTER].
This changes the way that titles are displayed. You can select to
display titles by No., recording date, day, channel, recording start
time and title name. (You cannot select a title if it has a check mark.)
If you close the COPY Navigator screen, the display order is
cancelled.
Rec for High Speed Copy (➡ 61)
Copy speed
Only titles recorded with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “On”.
High speed
Only titles recorded with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “Off”.
Normal speed
(Recording mode is
FR.)
[Note]
When making a copy of multiple titles that
were recorded with “Rec for High Speed
Copy” set to “On” and “Off”.
≥When copying titles in high speed mode to 5x high speed recording
compatible DVD-RAM or 8x high speed recording compatible DVD-
R or +R, the sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than
normal.
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal (Silent)” in
“DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (➡ 61).
≥If you register multiple titles, they are copied in order from the title
at the top of the screen and not in the order you registered them.
To change the order that titles are copied, create a copying list and
then copy the contents of the list (➡ 49).
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] When making a copy that contains titles recorded in “EP”
mode or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode (Displayed
copy will be performed at normal speed (Recording mode is FR).
),
≥If the copy destination disc space is exceeded, copy will be
performed at normal speed (Recording mode is FR).
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
RQT8388
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 Register titles and playlists for copy.
Copying using the copying list–
Advanced Copy
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (➡ step 7).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
[HDD] ,-. [RAM] [+RW]
[-RW‹VR›]
[HDD]
[SD]
>
[HDD]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[HDD] [RAM]
Copy
>
>
Cancel All
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
( 0%)
0MB
Size:
Name of item
New item (Total=0)
1
2
3
Copy Direction
HDD > DVD
No. Size
s
t
You can order titles and playlists as desired for copy to disc.
Copy Mode
s
i
l
VIDEO High Speed
Create List
y
See also the notes “Before copying” (➡ 48).
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
Start Copying
ENTER
pla
S
SUB MENU
RETURN
1
While stopped
or
s
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [ENTER].
3 Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO” or press the
“Green” button to select “Playlists”.
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
Create List
ngitle
VIDEO
- - -
Playlists
HDD
y
and press [ENTER].
007
008
0:30(XP)
ARD 10.10. FRI
- - -
ARD 11.10. SAT
- - -
Cop
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced
- - -
Copy” and press [ENTER].
Previous
ENTER
Page 02/02
Select
Next
Previous
Copy
S
SUB MENU
Next
RETURN
Cancel All
Source
HDD
DVD
1 Copy Direction
HDD > DVD
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the titles or playlists and
press [ENTER].
Destination
Copy Mode
2
VIDEO High Speed
≥When copying to a disc using high speed mode,
0
Create List
3
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] : only items indicated with “
” can be registered.
” or
Select the copy direction.
Start Copying
ENTER
RETURN
“
≥If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]
several times (➡ step 7).
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : only items indicated with “
be registered.
” can
≥To select a multiple number of items together, press
[;] to add the check mark and press [ENTER]
(➡ below, Multiple editing).
≥To show other pages (➡ below)
≥To edit the copying list (➡ 50)
4 Set the copy direction.
≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[4] (➡ step 5).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press
[ENTER].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [ENTER].
The same drive as the copy source cannot be selected.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
You can register a multiple number of titles and
playlists on the copying list by repeating
steps 2–4.
You cannot start copying when the value of the “Size”
(➡ 50) exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity” is not
sufficient).
5 Press [2] to confirm.
5 Set the recording mode.
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press [4]
(➡ step 6).
Copying” and press [ENTER].
When copying titles in high speed mode to 5x high speed
recording compatible DVD-RAM or 8x high speed recording
compatible DVD-R or +R, the sound of the disc rotating
becomes louder than normal.
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal
(Silent)” in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup
menu (➡ 61).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].
2
3
4
Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [ENTER]
Press [3, 4] to select “VIDEO” and press [ENTER]
Press [3, 4] to select “Recording Mode” and press
[ENTER]
Press [3, 4] to select the mode and press [ENTER]
.
.
.
5
.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER] to start copying.
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy & Finalize” or
“Copy Only” and press [ENTER].
≥If “Copy & Finalize” is selected
After finalizing, the discs become play-only and you can also
play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no
longer record or edit.
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
Press [ENTER] to register to the list.
≥A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
≥When you switch between the “VIDEO” and “Playlists” tab, the
check mark is cancelled.
RQT8388
(continued on the next page)
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles or playlists
(Continued)
To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL,DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalize them after
copy.
Refer to the control reference on page 48.
∫ To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
(You cannot stop while finalizing)
∫ To edit the copying list
Delete All
Select the item in step 6–4 (➡ 49, right column)
Add
1
2
Press [SUB MENU].
When High-speed copying
All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are
copied.
Delete
Move
Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
[ENTER].
When Normal Speed copying
Delete All:
Copies until the point cancelled. However titles with “One time only
recording” restriction, only titles that have completely copied at the
point cancelled are copied to the disc. Titles that are cancelled
before the copy is complete are not copied and remain on the HDD.
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] If copy is cancelled during the step while copying
to the HDD, then nothing will be copied. However, if copy is
cancelled during the step while copying to disc from the HDD,
then only titles completely copied at the point cancelled are
copied.
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the playlists and titles to be added and
press [ENTER].
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
You can also delete multiple items (➡ 49, Multiple editing).
Move:
Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-
RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW, the amount of
remaining writable disc space becomes less.
Move selected items or change the order of items on the copying list.
Press [3, 4] to select the destination and press [ENTER].
∫ To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫ Recording and playing while copying
You can record and play using the HDD while high speed
copying. (Only when high speed copying without finalizing)
≥Still pictures cannot be played.
Press [ENTER] to cancel the screen display.
≥To confirm the current progress
To cancel all registered copying setting and lists
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 49, left column)
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [ENTER].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
–When a title, still picture, etc. has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
Press [ ].
[Note]
≥Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to the
HDD regardless of the recording drive settings.
(Only when high speed copying without finalizing)
COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions
COPY Navigator/Copying list indicators
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high
speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW
(➡ 24)
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high
speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) (➡ 24)
(However, titles and playlists cannot be copied in
high speed mode to +R, +R DL, +RW)
Title with “One time only recording” restriction
(➡ 8, When recording digital broadcasts)
Titles deleted from the HDD by “One time only
recording” restriction after copying.
(➡ 8, When recording digital broadcasts)
Title or playlist contains still picture(s)
≥Still picture(s) cannot be copied.
Title or playlist recorded using a different encoding
system from that of the TV system currently
selected on the unit.
(NTSC)
(PAL)
≥Titles and playlists displaying these marks
cannot be selected.
Data size of each registered item
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Size:
Size:
0MB (0%)
No. Size
Name of item
Data size recorded to the copy
destination
New item (Total=0)
≥When copying at normal speed, the
total data size will change according to
the recording mode.
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
≥The total data size shown may be
larger than the sum of the data sizes
for each registered item, because of
data management information being
written to the copy destination, etc.
RQT8388
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
When the top menu is displayed
Copying a finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title
you want to start copying, and press
[ENTER].
[DVD-V]
>
[HDD]
You can copy the content of finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD and re-edit.
While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the HDD
according to the set time.
My favorite
01/02
s
t
01
Chapter
02
Chapter
1
2
s
i
l
03
Chapter
04
Chapter
3
4
y
05
06
≥If you perform search, frame-by-frame or pause while copying, that
portion of title is not recorded.
pla
While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are
recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has
finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is
reached.)
or
s
≥Operations and on screen displays during copy are also
recorded.
≥Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent
illegal copying, and cannot be copied.
≥The following cannot be copied: DVD-Audio, Video CD, Audio
CD and so on.
To return to the previous screen
ngitle
Press [RETURN].
y
To stop copying
Press [∫].
Cop
You can also press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds to stop
copying.
≥If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.
Preparation
≥Insert the finalized disc (➡ 30).
[Note]
After performing steps 1–5 (“Format” is automatically set to “DVD-
≥The screen saver on the right is recorded at the
beginning.
Video”) (➡ 49, Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy)
≥The content is recorded as 1 title from the start of
copy to the end.
6 Set “Copy Time”.
≥If play does not begin automatically or if the top
menu does not display automatically, press [1] (PLAY) to start.
≥Even if you copy a high quality video/audio DVD, the original
picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated.
≥If you want to copy a title from a finalized DVD-RW (DVD Video
Recording format), create a copy list and then copy (➡ 49, Copying
using the copying list–Advanced Copy).
≥If you are not going to change the setting (➡ step 7).
∫Setting the unit to copy according to the set
time
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Time Setting” and press [ENTER].
≥Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” and press [ENTER].
4 Press [2] to confirm.
Copying MPEG2 moving pictures from
an SD card
Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have been
taken by a Panasonic SD Video Camera, digital video camera etc,
can be stored on HDD or DVD-RAM.
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
≥You cannot playback MPEG2 moving pictures on an SD card with
this unit.
You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.
≥You cannot playback or record while copying MPEG2.
Copy will continue until there is not enough available
recording space on the HDD.
≥Setting the copying time
3 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [ENTER].
Copy
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
DVD > HDD
2
Hour
00 Min.
Copy Mode
2
3
VIDEO§
MPEG2
DVD-Video XP
Set the time a few minutes
longer.
Copy Time
HDD
Press ENTER to change settings.
Start Copying
ENTER
RETURN
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press [3, 4]
to set the recording time.
DVD-RAM
6 Press [ENTER].
7 Press [2] to confirm.
§ Conventionally recorded programmes
Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after
the content being played finishes.
The display below automatically appears when you insert a card
into the SD card slot while stopped.
≥Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to
include the operation time before play begins.
≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video (MPEG2)” and press
[ENTER]. Then go to step 7 on page 49.
SD Card
Album View
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
Copy Video (MPEG2)
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
SELECT
Copying” and press [ENTER].
RETURN
ENTER
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER] to start
copying.
The disc top menu is displayed.
≥Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is
selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalizing
the disc (➡ 57).
How to copy
Refer to “Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy” (➡ 49)
Please set the items in step 4 and 5 as shown below.
Copy Direction:
Source : SD CARD
Copy Mode:
Format : VIDEO
≥MPEG2 moving pictures on an SD card are automatically
registered on the copy list.
≥If there are no MPEG2 moving pictures on an SD card, “Copy
Video (MPEG2)” is not displayed.
RQT8388
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying still pictures
6 Register still pictures for copy.
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
DVD
TV
changes to it (➡ step 7).
Í
Í
You can register still pictures or still picture folders.
≥Still pictures and folders cannot be registered on the same
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
PAGE
CH
list.
2 3
4 5 6
1
Copy
Numbered
buttons
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Cancel All
Picture
Picture/Folder
ANALOGUE
1 Copy Direction
No. Size
Name of item
New item (Total=0)
SD CARD > HDD
8 9
CH
7
Copy Mode
PICTURE High Speed
2
G-Code
INPUT
SELECT
0
Create List
3
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
:, 9
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
Start Copying
ENTER
S
SUB MENU
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
RETURN
;
TIME SLIP
∫ To register individual still pictures
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture and press
[ENTER].
/
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
ENTER
3,4,2,1
ENTER
≥To select a multiple number of items together, press
[;] to add the check mark and press [ENTER] (➡ 53,
Multiple editing).
SUB MENU
RETURN
S
SUB MENU
CREATE
CHAPTER
AUDIO
MANUAL SKIP
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
≥To show other pages (➡ 53)
≥To select the still pictures in another folder (➡ 53)
≥To edit the copying list (➡ 53)
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB
(➡ 7).
≥You cannot copy pictures recorded to CD-R/CD-RW.
You can register a multiple number of still pictures on
[SD]
the copying list by repeating steps 2–3.
While stopped put the card in the slot, and the menu (➡ below) is
automatically displayed.
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Pictures (JPEG)”, press [ENTER] and
then go to step 4 on page 53, “Copying all the still pictures on a
card—Copy All Pictures”.
4 Press [2] to confirm.
∫ To register on a folder by folder basis
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
SD Card
Album View
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Picture/Folder” and press [ENTER].
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
Copy Video (MPEG2)
Copy
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Cancel All
Picture
Picture/Folder
SELECT
1 Copy Direction
No. Size
Name of item
RETURN
ENTER
SD CARD > HDD
New item (Total=0)
Copy Mode
Press [RETURN] to exit the screen.
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [ENTER].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [ENTER].
Copying using the copying list
1
While stopped
≥To select a multiple number of items together, press
[;] to add the check mark and press [ENTER] (➡ 53,
Multiple editing).
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
≥To show other pages (➡ 53)
≥To switch to another higher folder (➡ 53)
≥To edit the copying list (➡ 53)
and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced
You can register a multiple number of folders on the
copying list by repeating steps 4–5.
Copy” and press [ENTER].
Copy
6 Press [2] to confirm.
Cancel All
Source
SD CARD
HDD
1 Copy Direction
SD CARD > HDD
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Destination
Copy Mode
2
PICTURE High Speed
Copying” and press [ENTER].
≥For individual still pictures only
0
Create List
3
≥If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]
several times (➡ step 7).
When specifying another folder as the copying destination,
select “Folder”.
4 Set the copy direction.
Folder
New folder
001 100__DVD
002 101__DVD
003 102__DVD
≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[4] (➡ step 5).
-
New folder
---
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press
[1].
8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [ENTER].
press [ENTER] to start copying.
4
Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press
[ENTER].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [ENTER].
The same drive as the copy source can be selected.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
5 Set the recording mode.
≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press [4]
(➡ step 6).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “PICTURE” and press [ENTER]
.
RQT8388
“Recording Mode” is automatically set to “High Speed”.
4 Press [2] to confirm.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER].
Copying all the still pictures on a card—
Copy All Pictures
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
[SD]
>
[HDD] [RAM]
Multiple editing
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the SD drive.
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
Press [ENTER] to register to the list.
≥A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
s
e
1
While stopped
ur
t
∫ To edit the copying list
Press [FUNCTIONS].
Select the item in step 6–3 (for a still picture) or 6–5
Delete All
lpic
i
t
(for a folder) (➡ 52, right column)
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
Add
1
2
Press [SUB MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
[ENTER].
and press [ENTER].
Delete
ings
y
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy All
Delete All:
Pictures” and press [ENTER].
Cop
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture or folder to be added
and press [ENTER].
Copy All Pictures
Copy from
Copy to
SD CARD
HDD
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
You can also delete multiple items (➡ above, Multiple editing).
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy to” and
press [2, 1] to select the drive.
5 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Copy”
and press [ENTER].
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 52)
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [ENTER].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
–When a title or still picture has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
remove the card, open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
∫ To select another folder
(➡ 7, Structure of folders displayed by this unit)
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [ENTER].
If you want to switch to another higher folder (➡ below).
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [ENTER].
Create List
SD CARD
Create List
SD CARD
Picture (JPEG)
Folder
Folder
103__DVD
\DCIM\100__DVD
0001
----
----
0002
----
----
0003
----
0004
----
001 100__DVD
002 101__DVD
003 102__DVD
004 103__DVD
---
---
---
---
----
----
Page 01/01
Picture 0012 File 0012
Page 001/001
Previous
Next
ENTER
RETURN
ENTER
S
SUB MENU
RETURN
You can also select folders with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
15:
115:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
[1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
[Note]
≥When copying the still pictures on a folder by folder basis
(➡ 52) or card by card basis (➡ above, Copy All Pictures), files
other than the still picture files inside the folder will also be
copied. (This does not apply to the lower folders contained
inside the folders.)
≥If still pictures are already contained inside the copy destination
folder, the new still pictures are recorded following the existing
still pictures.
≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of
files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (➡ 33), copying
will stop partway through.
≥When a name has not been input for the copy source folder, it is
possible that this folder’s name will not be the same on the copy
destination. It is recommended that you input a folder name
before copying (➡ 45, Enter Album Name).
≥The still pictures of different folders cannot be registered on the
same list.
To switch to another higher folder
≥Only when selecting the source folder
If there is a multiple number of higher
\DCIM\100__DVD
folders recognizable, while the screen on
the right appears
001 100__DVD
002 101__DVD
003 102__DVD
004 103__DVD
1 Press [SUB MENU] and press [ENTER].
2 Press [2, 1] to select the higher
Select Folder
folder and press [ENTER].
You cannot register a folder with a
different higher folder to the same
Select folder to access.
\DCIM
Press ENTER to set.
SELECT
list.
RETURN
ENTER
≥You cannot copy the information about the print number setting
(DPOF) or the picture rotation.
≥The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on the
copy list may not be the same at the copy destination.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the desired
folder and press [ENTER].
RQT8388
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying from a video cassette recorder
Í
Í
VOLUME
CH
3
When you want to start recording
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
DRIVE
SELECT
Press [¥ REC].
PAGE
CH
Recording starts.
2 3
1
4 5 6
To skip unwanted parts
ANALOGUE
8 9
CH
7
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
G-Code
INPUT
SELECT
0
To stop recording
Press [∫].
INPUT
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
Almost all videos and DVD-Video on sale have been treated
to prevent illegal copying. Any software that has been so
treated cannot be recorded using this unit.
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
∫
;
TIME SLIP
/
≥Using Flexible Recording (➡ 25), you can record the content of a
video cassette (approx. 1–8 hours) to a 4.7 GB disc with the best
possible quality of recording without wasting disc space.
FUNCTIONS
ENTER
3,4,2,1
ENTER
SUB MENU
RETURN
S
DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec)
CREATE
CHAPTER
AUDIO
MANUAL SKIP
REC MODE
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
DISPLAY DELETE
REC
REC MODE
¥ REC
[HDD] [RAM] When the “DV Auto Rec” function is used, programmes
are recorded as a title while at the same time chapters are created at
each break in the images and the play list is created automatically.
e.g., Connecting to the AV3 or DV input terminals on the front
You can also connect to the AV4 input terminals on the rear.
Preparation
≥Turn off the unit and other video equipment before connecting.
1
Turn off the main unit and DV equipment, then connect the
equipment with the unit’s DV input terminal (➡ left column).
Turn on the main unit and DV equipment.
DRIVE
SELECT
REC
OPEN/CLOSE
2
3
4
k
1
.
3
CH
Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode.
Pause play of the DV equipment at the point you want recording
to start.
S
VIDEO IN VIDEO IN L/MONO -UDIO IN-
AV3
R
DV IN
This unit
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
DV IN
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 67).
VIDEO IN L/MONO - AUDIO IN - R
S VIDEO IN
After preparation is completed, the following screen appears.
Yellow White Red
DV Auto Rec
Press [2, 1] to select “Rec to
HDD” or “Rec to DVD” and press
[ENTER].
DV unit is connected.
Record from the DV unit?
DV cable
(IEEE 1394, 4-pin)
S Video
cable§
Audio/Video
cable
Rec to HDD
Rec to DVD
Cancel
You can proceed to step 4.
SELECT
ENTER
Other video equipment
RETURN
≥When the screen is not displayed, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select
HDD or DVD and then continue from step 1.
Connect to Audio/Video output terminals.
If the audio output of the other equipment is monaural
Connect to L/MONO on the AV3 input terminals at the front.
§ The S VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO terminal.
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
When recording from the unit’s DV terminal
Select the type of audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input” in
the Setup menu (➡ 62).
When recording from DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder),
you can record audio/video recordings from DV tape only.
and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “DV Auto Rec”
and press [ENTER].
[Note]
If it becomes time for a timer recording to start while copying, the
recording will start and the copying will stop.
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Rec” and
press [ENTER].
Recording starts.
Manual recording
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode.
≥When recording bilingual programmes (➡ 8, Important notes for
recording)
When recording finishes
The confirmation screen appears. Press [ENTER] to finish DV
automatic recording.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 67).
This unit cannot record to discs containing both PAL and NTSC
signals. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded
onto the HDD.)
≥To reduce noise in input from a video cassette recorder, set “AV-in
NR” to “On” in the on-screen menu (➡ 39).
≥Check the time on the unit is correct.
[Note]
≥Only one piece of DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder) can
be connected to the unit via the DV input terminal.
It is not possible to operate the unit from the connected DV equipment.
≥
≥The DV input on this unit is for use with DV equipment only. (It
cannot be connected to a computer, etc.)
≥The DV equipment name may not be shown correctly.
≥Depending on the DV equipment, the images or audio may not be
input properly.
≥The date and time information on the tape of the DV equipment will
not be recorded.
≥You cannot record and play simultaneously.
1
While stopped
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the
input channel for the equipment you
have connected.
If the DV automatic recording function does not work properly,
check the connections and DV equipment settings, and turn the
unit off and back on.
If that does not work, follow the instructions for manual
recording (➡ left column).
e.g., If you have connected to AV3 input terminals, select
“AV3”.
RQT8388
2 Start play on the other equipment.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD, disc and card management
Setting the protection
[RAM]
DVD
TV
Í
Í
VOLUME
CH
Preparation
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
DRIVE SELECT
PAGE
CH
2 3
4 5 6
1
t
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)
ANALOGUE
men
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc
8 9
CH
7
e
g
a
G-Code
INPUT
SELECT
0
Protection” and press [ENTER].
n
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
ma
d
r
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
press [ENTER].
TIME SLIP
ca
DVD
Management
DVD-RAM
d
/
Titles
Used
11
0 : 22
Remain 5:38 (EP)
an
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
Disc Name
sc
ENTER
i
Disc Protection
Delete all titles
On
3,4,2,1
,d
SUB MENU
RETURN
ENTER
SELECT
S
CREATE
CHAPTER
AUDIO
MANUAL SKIP
ENTER
Format Disc
RETURN
/HD
DISPLAY DELETE
REC
REC MODE
er
The lock symbol appears closed when the disc is write-
protected.
d
r
eco
r
To return to the previous screen
e
t
Press [RETURN].
set
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
cas
o
e
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] [SD]
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB
(➡ 7).
d
Cartridge-protection
avi
For a DVD-RAM with a cartridge
≥With the write-protect tab in the protect position,
play automatically starts when inserted in the
m
Common procedures
o
r
f
g
PROTECT
unit.
1
While stopped
in
y
p
Press [FUNCTIONS].
[SD]
Switch the write-protect switch to the “LOCK” position.
Co
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [ENTER].
FUNCTIONS
HDD
Remain 30:00 SP
G-Code Record
Playback
Recording
Advanced Copy
Playlists
Providing a name for a disc
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Delete
Flexible Rec
DV Auto Rec
Copy
To Others
Setup
You can provide a name for each disc.
ENTER
RETURN
HDD Management
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ above).
3 Press [3, 4] to select “HDD
Management”, “DVD Management” or
“Card Management” and press
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc Name”
and press [ENTER].
[ENTER].
e.g., [RAM]
DVD
Management
DVD-RAM
Titles
Used
11
0 : 22
Remain 5:38 (EP)
➡ 58, Entering text
Disc Name
≥The disc name is displayed in the DVD Management window.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] With a finalized disc, the name is
displayed on the Top Menu.
≥[+RW] The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on other
equipment.
Disc Protection
Delete all titles
Off
SELECT
ENTER
Format Disc
RETURN
Documentary
My favorite
01/02
DVD
Management
DVD-RAM
Titles
Used
11
0 : 22
Remain 5:38 (
01
Chapter
02
Chapter
≥When HDD has been selected, “Delete all titles” and
“Format HDD” are displayed.
1
2
≥When SD has been selected, “Format Card” only is
displayed.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
RQT8388
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD, disc and card management
Refer to the control reference on page 55.
Deleting all the contents of a disc or
card—Format
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] [SD]
[+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)
Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete
all titles
[HDD] [RAM]
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.
≥Release protection (➡ 55).
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥Release protection (➡ 55).
[Note]
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 55)
Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data),
and they cannot be restored. Check carefully before
proceeding. The contents are deleted when you format a disc or
card even if you have set protection.
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete all
titles” and press [ENTER].
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 55)
press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Format HDD”,
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
“Format Disc” or “Format Card” and
press [ENTER].
press [ENTER].
A message appears when finished.
7 Press [ENTER].
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
press [ENTER].
A message appears when formatting is finished.
[Note]
≥Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however, it may
take up to a maximum of 70 minutes ([RAM]).
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.
This can render the disc or the card unusable.
[Note]
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥Deleting all video titles will result in all playlists also being deleted.
≥Still picture data (JPEG, TIFF) or computer data cannot be deleted.
≥Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.
7 Press [ENTER].
[Note]
≥When a disc or card has been formatted using this unit, it may not
be possible to use it on any other equipment.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Formatting cannot be performed on the disc.
≥You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video format on this unit.
To stop formatting [RAM]
Press [RETURN].
≥You can cancel formatting if it takes more than 2 minutes. The disc
must be reformatted if you do this.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
RQT8388
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Note]
Selecting the background style–Top Menu
When finalizing a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take
longer than displayed on the confirmation screen (approximately four
times).
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can select the background that will be displayed as the DVD-
Video top menu after finalizing.
After finalizing
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The disc becomes play-only and you
can no longer record or edit.
nt
≥[-RW‹V›] You can record and edit the disc after formatting
(➡ 56) although it becomes play-only after finalizing.
≥When copying in high speed, chapters will be replicated.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] Titles are divided into about 5-minute ([+R] 8-
minute)§ chapters, if
–the titles were directly recorded to the disc.
–the titles were copied using any mode other than the high
speed mode (excluding [-R]DL] [+R]DL]).
§ This time varies greatly depending on the condition and mode
of recording.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 55)
me
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu”
and press [ENTER].
e
g
na
5 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
ma
d
r
background and press [ENTER].
a
Top Menu List
ndc
1
2
3
a
c
≥There is a pause of several seconds between titles and
chapters during play.
Display after finalizing
01
Thumbnail
,dis
(Still picture)
Title Name
Before
After
HD
finalizing
finalizing
≥You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu. (➡ 41,
Change Thumbnail)
Recording/Editing/Entering name
Play on other players
Y
t
t
Y
Selecting whether to show the Top
Menu first–Auto-Play Select
≥You cannot finalize discs recorded on other manufacturer’s
equipment.
≥If you finalize discs recorded on Panasonic equipment other than
this unit, the background selected as “Top Menu” may not be
displayed.
≥Discs finalized on this unit may not be playable on other players
due to the condition of the recording.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can select whether to show the top menu after finalizing.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 55)
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Play
Select” and press [ENTER].
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu
[+RW]
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or
+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a convenient
function. We recommend you create the menu before playing a +RW
disc on other equipment.
“Title 1” and press [ENTER].
Top Menu: The top menu appears first.
You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.
Title 1:
The disc content is played without displaying the
top menu.
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (➡ left
column) before creating top menu.
Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment–Finalize
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (➡ above)
before finalizing the disc.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 55)
Preparation
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Create Top
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
Menu” and press [ENTER].
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 55)
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Finalize” and
press [ENTER].
press [ENTER].
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER].
press [ENTER].
Creating Top Menu starts. You cannot cancel creating.
Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [ENTER].
7 Press [ENTER].
A message appears when finalizing is finished.
[Note]
[Note]
≥You can record or edit discs after creating the Top Menu. But the
created menu is deleted when you record or edit disc. In such
cases, create the Top Menu again by using “Create Top Menu”.
≥You cannot cancel finalizing.
≥Finalizing takes up to 15 minutes.
([-R]DL] [+R]DL] Finalizing takes up to 60 minutes.)
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalizing.
This will render the disc unusable.
7 Press [ENTER].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
RQT8388
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering text
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a
DVD
TV
Í
character and press [ENTER].
Í
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
Repeat this step to enter other characters.
SELECT
AV
PAGE
CH
≥To delete a character
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character in the name field
and press [;]. (The selected characters are deleted.)
2 3
4 5 6
1
Numbered
buttons
ANALOGUE
8 9
CH
7
≥Using the numbered buttons to enter characters
G-Code
INPUT
SELECT
0
e.g., entering the letter “R”
¢
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
1
Press [7] to move to the 7th row.
5
J
K
N
Q
U
L
O
R
V
:, 9
2 Press [7] twice to highlight
“R”.
3 Press [ENTER].
7
7
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
6 M
∫
;
TIME SLIP
7
P
T
7
/
≥To enter a space
Press [¢] and press [ENTER].
≥Add/recall names (➡ below)
8
ENTER
3,4,2,1
ENTER
SUB MENU
RETURN
3 Press [∫] (Set).
S
SUB MENU
RETURN
CREATE
“Writing...” appears then the screen returns to the Title view
screen and so on.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [SD]
You can give names to recorded titles, etc.
To end partway
The maximum number of characters:
Press [RETURN].
Text is not added.
≥[HDD] [RAM]
Characters
64 (44§)
Title
Playlist
Album of still pictures
Disc ([RAM])
64
36
64
∫ To add a name
You can add frequently used names and recall them later.
Maximum number of added names: 20
Maximum number of characters per name: 20
§Title name for timer recording
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Characters
After entering the name (steps 1–2).
Title
Disc
44
40
1
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Add to List” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [9] to select “Add to List”.
Press [2, 1] to select “Add” and press [ENTER].
≥Press [RETURN] to cancel.
≥[SD]
Characters
36
2
Album of still pictures
≥Broadcast
Favourite group 1-4
Characters
12
∫ To recall an added name
1
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “List Names” and press
[ENTER].
[Note]
≥You can also press [:] to select “List Names”.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the name to be recalled and
If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.
2
press [ENTER].
1 Show Enter Name screen.
∫ To delete an added name
1
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “List Names” and press
Title (timer recording)
[ENTER].
Select “Programme Name” in step 3 on page 27.
≥You can also press [:] to select “List Names”.
Title
2
3
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the name to be deleted.
Press [SUB MENU] to show “Delete Name” and press
[ENTER].
Select “Enter Name” in step 5 on page 40.
Playlist
Select “Enter Name” in step 5 on page 43.
4
5
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].
Press [RETURN].
Disc
Select “Disc Name” in step 4 of “Providing a name for a
disc” on page 55.
Album of still pictures
Select “Enter Album Name” in step 4 on page 44, “To edit
the album”.
For your reference
If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the Top Menu
after finalization (➡ 57). When entering a title name, the name that
will appear in the Top Menu can be previewed in “Top Menu Preview”
window.
Favourite group 1-4
Press the “Red” button in step 2 right column on page 65,
“To change the name of a group”.
Enter Name
_
Chapter 1_
Name field: shows the text you have entered
1
2
3
4
1
A
D
G
2
B
E
H
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
d
g
6
b
e
h
7
c
f
8
i
/
9
j
l
$
0
Top Menu Preview
Chapter 1
Enter Name
_
*
%
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
A
D
G
J
2
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
,
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
6
b
e
7
c
f
8
i
/
9
j
l
$
0
Top Menu Preview
i
fl
&
*
d
g
j
%
h
k
i
fl
O
[
&
@
_
L
O
R
V
Y
?
l
N
]
;
π
Delete
m
n
o
M
P
T
Add to List
List Names
S
p
t
q
u
x
'
r
s
{
(
)
-
v
}
W
.
Z
!
w
"
y
:
z
;
|
\
Set
^
`
SELECT
Space
RETURN
ENTER
RQT8388
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUNCTIONS window
By using the FUNCTIONS window you may access the main
functions quickly and easily.
DVD
TV
1
While stopped
Í
Í
Press [FUNCTIONS].
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
Functions displayed depend on the selected drive or type of
disc.
PAGE
CH
k
2 3
1
FUNCTIONS
HDD
Remain 30:00 SP
4 5 6
Playback
ANALOGUE
8 9
CH
7
Recording
G-Code
INPUT
Delete
/ChildLoc
SELECT
0
Copy
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
w
o
d
To Others
ENTER
RETURN
n
i
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
w
TIME SLIP
/
2 Press [3, 4] to select an item and
press [ENTER].
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
ENTER
3,4,2,1
≥If you select “To Others” and press [ENTER], the following
screen appears. Press [3, 4] to select an item and press
[ENTER].
ENTER
SUB MENU
RETURN
/FUCTIONS
S
t
CREATE
CHAPTER
x
e
AUDIO
MANUAL SKIP
FUNCTIONS
HDD
Remain 30:00 SP
G-Code Record
DISPLAY DELETE
REC
REC MODE
Playback
ngt
i
Recording
Advanced Copy
Playlists
Delete
Flexible Rec
DV Auto Rec
ter
Copy
n
E
To Others
Setup
ENTER
RETURN
HDD Management
≥If you press [RETURN], you can return to the previous
screen.
To exit the FUNCTIONS window
Press [FUNCTIONS].
Child Lock
The Child Lock deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote
control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.
DVD
Press and hold [ENTER]
and [RETURN]
TV
Í
Í
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
simultaneously until “X
HOLD” appears on the unit’s display.
PAGE
CH
2 3
4 5 6
1
ANALOGUE
If you press a button while the Child Lock is on, “X HOLD” appears
on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.
8 9
CH
7
G-Code
INPUT
SELECT
0
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
To cancel the Child Lock
Press and hold [ENTER] and [RETURN] simultaneously until “X
HOLD” disappears.
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
TIME SLIP
/
ENTER
ENTER
SUB MENU
RETURN
S
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
AUDIO
MANUAL SKIP
RQT8388
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
W
X
CH
Common procedures
1
While stopped
DRIVE
SELECT
REC
OPEN/CLOSE
k
1
.3
CH
S
VIDEO IN VIDEO IN L/MONO -AUDIO IN-
AV3
R
Press [FUNCTIONS].
DV IN
∫
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
< OPEN/CLOSE
and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [ENTER].
DVD
4 Press [3, 4] to select the tab and
TV
Í
Í
press [1].
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
Menus
Options
Tabs
PAGE
CH
2 3
Setup
1
Comb Filter
Still Mode
Seamless Play
On
Automatic
On
Numbered
buttons
CH W X
4 5 6
7
ANALOGUE
Tuning
8 9
0
CH
Disc
Picture
Sound
G-Code
INPUT
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
Display
Connection
Others
SELECT
ENTER
TAB
RETURN
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
STOP
TIME SLIP
5 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and
/
press [ENTER].
FUNCTIONS
ENTER
6 Press [3, 4] to select the option and
3,4,2,1
ENTER
SUB MENU
RETURN
press [ENTER].
S
RETURN
“Blue”
CREATE
CHAPTER
AUDIO
MANUAL SKIP
“Red”
To return to the previous screen
DISPLAY DELETE
REC
REC MODE
“Green”
“Yellow”
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
[Note]
There may be differences in operation methods. If this happens,
follow the on-screen instructions for the operation.
Summary of settings
The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.
Tabs
Menus
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)
Edit Favourites (➡ 65)
You can edit terrestrial digital or analogue channels into different
groups.
Tuning
Auto-Setup Restart (➡ 66)
You can restart the channel settings for terrestrial digital and
analogue channels.
Add New DVB Services (➡ 65)
You can search for newly added terrestrial digital channels to
receive.
Signal Condition (➡ 65)
You can check the condition of digital broadcast signals.
Manual (➡ 66)
You can make the following changes to the analogue channel
setting: delete channels, and set the channel details.
RQT8388
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tabs
Disc
Menus
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)
Settings for Playback
≥Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
Ratings
≥8 No Limit: All DVD-Video can be played.
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.
≥1 to 7:
Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding
ratings recorded on them.
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit password
with the numbered buttons when the password screen is
shown.
≥0 Lock All: Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.
tings
e
≥Unlock Recorder
≥Change Level
≥Change Password
≥Temporary Unlock
s
s
≥Do not forget your password.
DVD-Audio Video mode Playback
≥On: The setting returns to “Off” when you change the disc or
unit’
Select “On” to play DVD-Video content on some DVD-Audio.
turn the unit off.
≥Off
Soundtrack Choose the language for audio, subtitle and
≥English
≥German
≥French
≥Italian
disc menus. [DVD-V]
≥Spanish
ingthe
n
≥Some discs start in a certain language despite ≥Original: The original language of each disc will be selected.
any changes you make here.
≥Other ¢¢¢¢
Cha
≥Enter a code (➡ 63) with the numbered
buttons when you select “Other ¢¢¢¢”.
When the selected language is not available
on the disc, the default language is played.
There are discs where you can only switch the
language from the menu screen (➡ 31).
Subtitle
Menus
≥Automatic: If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is not
available, subtitles of that language will automatically
appear if available on that disc.
≥English
≥German
≥French
≥Italian
≥Spanish
≥Other ¢¢¢¢
≥English
≥German
≥French
≥Italian
≥Spanish
≥Other ¢¢¢¢
Settings for Recording
≥Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
Recording time in EP mode
≥EP (6Hours):You can record for 6 hours on an unused 4.7 GB
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP
mode (➡ 23, Recording modes and approximate recording
times).
disc.
≥EP (8Hours):You can record for 8 hours on an unused 4.7 GB
disc.
The sound quality is better when using “EP (6Hours)” than when
using “EP (8Hours)”.
Rec for High Speed Copy
≥On: Makes high speed mode copying to DVD-R, etc. possible.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
–Pictures are saved in 4:3.
When high speed copying a title to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-
RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW, it is
necessary to turn this setting “On” before recording to the
HDD; however, the screen size, etc. is restricted (➡ right).
–Select the type of audio in advance from “Bilingual Audio
Selection” (➡ 62).
We recommend turning the setting “Off” if high speed copy to ≥Off
DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme.
DVD Speed for High Speed Copy
≥Maximum
Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-
speed copy compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R, +R 8X or
+RW 4X discs).
≥Normal (Silent):
Selecting “Normal (Silent)” means the noise generated by this
unit is less than “Maximum”, however the time required for
copying will double (approximately).
Comb Filter
≥On: Pictures become clear and vivid. Normally, use this
setting.
≥Off: Select it when recording noisy pictures.
Picture
Select the picture sharpness when recording.
The setting is fixed with “On” if you set “TV System” to “NTSC”
(➡ 67).
Still Mode
≥Automatic
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play
(➡ 76, Frames and fields).
≥Field: Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is selected.
(The picture is coarser.)
≥Frame: Select if small text or fine patterns cannot be seen
clearly when “Automatic” is selected. (The picture is
clearer and finer.)
Seamless Play
Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments and
partially deleted titles.
≥On: The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly. This does
not work when there are several audio types included on
the playlist and when using Quick View. Additionally, the
positioning of chapter segments may change slightly.
≥Off: The points where chapters in playlists change are played
accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.
RQT8388
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
Refer to the control reference on page 60.
Tabs
Menus
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)
Dynamic Range Compression [DVD-V] (Dolby Digital only)
Change the dynamic range for late night viewing.
≥On
≥Off
Sound
Bilingual Audio Selection
≥M 1
Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type
when:
≥M 2
You cannot select the audio on this unit when recording from an
–Recording or copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD- external source, such as when copying from a video cassette
Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW.
–“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (➡ 24).
recorder (except from DV equipment connected to this unit’s DV
input terminal). Select on the other equipment.
–Recording or copying sound in LPCM (➡ below, “Audio Mode When recording from the unit’s DV terminal, select the type of
for XP Recording”).
audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input” (➡ below).
Digital Audio Output
Change the settings when you have connected equipment through this unit’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (➡ 16).
≥Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
PCM Down Conversion
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96
kHz or 88.2 kHz.
≥On: Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz. (Choose
when the connected equipment cannot process signals
with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz.)
≥Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz despite the ≥Off: Signals are output as 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz. (Choose when
settings across if the signals have a sampling frequency
of over 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz, or the disc has copy
protection.
the connected equipment can process signals with a
sampling frequency of 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz.)
Dolby Digital Select how to output the signal.
Select “Bitstream” if the connected
≥Bitstream:When connecting to equipment displaying the Dolby
Digital logo.
equipment decodes the signal.
≥PCM: When connecting to equipment not displaying the Dolby
Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal
Digital logo.
and outputs it as 2 channels.
DTS
≥Bitstream: When connecting to equipment displaying the DTS
logo.
[Note]
≥PCM: When connecting to equipment not displaying the DTS
Not making the proper settings may result
in noise or some trouble for digital
logo.
MPEG
≥Bitstream: When connected to equipment with a built-in
recording.
MPEG decoder.
≥PCM: When connected to equipment without a built-in MPEG
decoder.
Audio Mode for XP Recording
≥Dolby Digital (➡ 76)
Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP
mode.
≥LPCM (➡ 76)
–The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than
that of normal XP mode recordings.
–The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you
selected LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.
–When recording a bilingual broadcast, select the type of
audio in advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ above).
Audio Mode for DV Input
≥Stereo 1: Records audio (L1, R1).
You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s ≥Stereo 2: Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)
DV input terminal (➡ 54).
subsequent to original recording.
≥Mix:
Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.
When recording bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ above).
On-Screen Messages
Choose the approximate time until the digital channel
information screen (➡ 21) disappears automatically.
≥Off: The digital channel information is not displayed.
Display
≥3 sec.
≥5 sec.
≥7 sec.
≥10 sec.
Grey Background
≥On
Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the grey
background when tuner reception is weak.
≥Off
FL Display
≥Bright
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.
This setting is fixed with “Automatic” if you set “Power Save”
(➡ 64) to “On”.
≥Dim
≥Automatic: The display turns dark during play and disappears
when the unit is turned off. It reappears
momentarily if a button is pressed. While using this
mode, the standby power consumption can be
reduced.
RQT8388
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tabs
Menus
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)
TV Aspect (➡ 18)
Set to match the type of television ≥16:9
≥4:3
≥Letterbox
Connection
connected.
Progressive (➡ 19)
≥On
≥Off
This setting is fixed with
“Off” if you set “AV1 Output”
to “RGB 1 (without
component)” or “RGB 2
(without component)”.
tings
e
TV System (➡ 67)
≥PAL
≥NTSC
s
s
HDMI Settings
≥Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
unit’
HDMI Video Format
You can only select items compatible with the connected
equipment. This setting normally does not need to be
≥576i/480i
≥576p/480p
≥720p
changed. However if you are concerned about output picture ≥1080i
ingthe
quality, it may be improved by changing the setting.
Still pictures play at a resolution equivalent to 480p
regardless of the settings.
≥Automatic: Automatically selects the output resolution best
suited to the connected television (1080i, 720p,
576p/480p or 576i/480i).
n
Cha
Aspect for 4:3 Video
≥4:3:
Picture is output as original aspect.
≥16:9: Picture is output as 16:9 aspect with side panels.
Digital Audio Output
≥HDMI and Optical
≥Optical Only: Select when this unit is connected to an amplifier
with an optical digital audio cable and connected
to a TV with an HDMI cable and you want to
enjoy the highest quality of audio from discs
(➡ 16).
Control with HDMI
≥On
≥Off: Select when you do not want to use Control with HDMI.
AV1 Output
≥
Video (with component):
Selects the output from the AV1 terminal.
Select “RGB 1 (without component)” or “RGB 2 (without
component)” for RGB output.
Select when a TV is connected that can receive a composite signal.
S Video (with component):
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an S Video signal.
≥
Select “Video (with component)” or “S Video (with component)” ≥RGB 1 (without component):
for component output (progressive output).
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB
Set according to the signal and terminal of the connected TV.
signal. If you always would like to view the picture from the unit
in RGB signal, select this mode. The TV screen will
automatically switch to display the picture from the unit when
the unit is turned on.
≥If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, you cannot select ≥RGB 2 (without component):
“RGB 1 (without component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)”. Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB
signal. If you would like to switch to display the picture from the
unit only when playback or viewing menus, select this mode.
AV2 Input
≥Video
This setting is according to the output signal of the connected
equipment.
≥S Video
Language code list Enter the code with the numbered buttons.
Abkhazian:
Afar:
6566 Catalan:
6565 Chinese:
6570 Corsican:
8381 Croatian:
6577 Czech:
6582 Danish:
7289 Dutch:
6583 English:
6589 Esperanto:
6590 Estonian:
6665 Faroese:
6985 Fiji:
6765 Gujarati:
9072 Hausa:
6779 Hebrew:
7282 Hindi:
6783 Hungarian:
6865 Icelandic:
7876 Indonesian:
6978 Interlingua:
6979 Irish:
7185 Lingala:
7678 Rhaeto-Romance:
Tamil:
8465
8484
8469
8472
6679
8473
8479
8482
8475
8487
8575
8582
8590
8673
8679
6789
8779
8872
7473
8979
9085
7265 Lithuanian:
7387 Macedonian:
7273 Malagasy:
7285 Malay:
7383 Malayalam:
7378 Maltese:
7365 Maori:
7165 Marathi:
7384 Moldavian:
7465 Mongolian:
7487 Nauru:
7578 Nepali:
7583 Norwegian:
7575 Oriya:
7589 Pashto, Pushto: 8083 Spanish:
7579 Persian:
7585 Polish:
7684
8277 Tatar:
8279 Telugu:
8285 Thai:
8377 Tibetan:
8365 Tigrinya:
Afrikaans:
Albanian:
Ameharic:
Arabic:
Armenian:
Assamese:
Aymara:
Azerbaijani:
Bashkir:
Basque:
7775 Romanian:
7771 Russian:
7783 Samoan:
7776 Sanskrit:
7784 Scots Gaelic: 7168 Tonga:
7773 Serbian: 8382 Turkish:
7782 Serbo-Croatian: 8372 Turkmen:
6984 Italian:
7779 Shona:
7778 Sindhi:
7865 Singhalese:
7869 Slovak:
7879 Slovenian:
7982 Somali:
8378 Twi:
8368 Ukrainian:
8373 Urdu:
7079 Japanese:
7074 Javanese:
7073 Kannada:
7082 Kashmiri:
7089 Kazakh:
7176 Kirghiz:
7565 Korean:
6869 Kurdish:
6976 Laotian:
7576 Latin:
Bengali; Bangla:
Finnish:
8375 Uzbek:
8376 Vietnamese:
8379 Volapük:
6983 Welsh:
8385 Wolof:
8387 Xhosa:
8386 Yiddish:
8476 Yoruba:
8471 Zulu:
6678 French:
6890 Frisian:
6672 Galician:
6682 Georgian:
6671 German:
7789 Greek:
Bhutani:
Bihari:
Breton:
7065 Sundanese:
8076 Swahili:
8084 Swedish:
8065 Tagalog:
8185 Tajik:
Bulgarian:
Burmese:
Byelorussian: 6669 Greenlandic:
Cambodian: 7577 Guarani:
7679 Portuguese:
7665 Punjabi:
7178 Latvian, Lettish: 7686 Quechua:
RQT8388
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
Refer to the control reference on page 60.
Tabs
Menus
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)
Remote Control (➡ 20)
Clock (➡ 67)
≥DVD 1
≥DVD 2
≥DVD 3
Others
Power Save
≥On: Power consumption is minimized when the unit is turned
≥Refer to the following when “Power Save” is set to “On”.
–“FL Display” is automatically set to “Automatic” (➡ 62).
–The “Quick Start” function does not work. (It is automatically
turned to “Off”.)
to standby (➡ 78).
≥Off
≥If “Quick Start” is set to “On”, “Power Save” is automatically
turned to “Off”.
Quick Start
≥On
The Quick Start feature enables this unit to be ready to start
recording as quick as approx. 1 second§ after turning it on. You
can start recording soon after deciding you want to record
something.
≥Off:
Standby power consumption is less than when this is
set to “On”.
§Only when recording to the HDD or DVD-RAM.
≥If this is set to “On”, “Power Save” is automatically turned to
“Off”.
≥Startup takes up to a minute when:
–You play a disc or start recording to discs other than DVD-
RAM.
–You want to make other operations.
–The clock has not been set.
DivX Registration
≥You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX
Video-on-Demand (VOD) content (➡ 35).
System Update
≥Update data is sent by an unscheduled digital broadcast. In
order to receive these updates, you must be able to receive
digital broadcasts.
≥An update will take approximately 30 minutes. While the
update is in progress, “SW-DL” appears on the unit’s display.
You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete.
Removing the AC mains lead while the update is in progress
may damage the unit.
In order to update this unit and support system changes made
by broadcasts, this unit periodically performs software updates.
≥Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
Software Update in Standby
≥On: You can perform the unit updates automatically when the
power is turned off.
≥Off
Software Search Period
≥Automatic:
The unit will give priority to searching for update
data at midnight.
Selects the time to perform updates automatically when the
power is turned off. This can only be set when “Software
Update in Standby” is set to “On”.
≥If there is a programmed recording set for the time you
have selected, the programmed recording will be given
priority.
≥02:00–06:00
≥06:00–10:00
≥10:00–14:00
≥14:00–18:00
≥18:00–22:00
≥22:00–02:00
Software Update Search Now
≥If applicable update data is found, press [2, 1] to select “Yes”
The unit will begin searching for update data.
and press [ENTER].
Initialize
≥Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
Shipping Condition
≥Yes
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password ≥No
and time settings return to the factory preset. The timer
recording programmes are also cancelled.
Default Settings
≥Yes
All the settings other than the programmed channels, time
settings, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings
password, remote control code, return to the factory presets.
≥No
RQT8388
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
∫ To change the name of a group
After performing steps 1–6
1Press [1].
Tuning
1
While stopped
2Press the “Red” button.
Press [FUNCTIONS].
➡ 58, Entering text
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
To browse through the list
Press [W X CH].
and press [ENTER].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
tings
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
e
s
s
press [ENTER].
Add New DVB Services
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Tuning” and
unit’
After performing steps 1–4
press [1].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Add New DVB
Services” and press [ENTER].
Setup
Edit Favourites
Auto-Setup Restart
Digital
Add New DVB Services
ingthe
n
Tuning
The unit starts searching for newly available terrestrial digital
channels. This takes about 5 minutes.
Disc
Signal Condition
Picture
Cha
Analogue
Add New DVB Services
Sound
Display
Manual
SELECT
TAB
Connection
Others
Please wait!
Ch 6
69
RETURN
ENTER
Prog. Channel Service Name
Net ID TS ID Quality
Edit Favourites
RETURN: to cancel
You can create four groups of channels for making viewing and recording
easier. Editing these groups does not affect the channel setting itself.
≥Timer recording may not work correctly if you edit the groups
during timer recording standby.
RETURN
A message is displayed when the search is finished.
6 Press [ENTER] to save the newly
found channels.
After performing steps 1–4
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit
Favourites” and press [ENTER].
To stop partway
Press [RETURN].
The channels found before stopping are not saved.
6 Press the “Green” button to select the
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
group.
Edit Favourites
All Services
2 ABC
20 ABC HDTV
Favourite 1
Signal Condition
You can check the quality and strength of digital broadcast signals.
Realign the aerial if you are receiving a poor signal.
When “Signal Condition” is displayed in grey and cannot be selected:
1 Press [RETURN] several times to exit the screen.
2 Press [W X CH] to select a digital channel. “D” appears on the
unit’s display.
Favourite Select
Add
Add All
Page -
SELECT
RETURN
∫ To add channels to a group
After performing steps 1–6
3 Display the Setup menu again (➡ left).
After performing steps 1–4
1Press [3, 4] to select the channel and press the
“Yellow” button.
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Signal
Condition” and press [ENTER].
≥Repeat this step to add other channels.
≥Press the “Blue” button to add all the available channels to the
group. (Only when no channels have been added to the group.)
2Press [ENTER] to save the group.
The quality and strength of the signal are shown.
Press [W X CH] to select the channel.
2 ABC 2W DVB CH30
Signal Quality
0
0
10
10
∫ To change the order of channels of a group
After performing steps 1–6
1Press [1].
Signal Strength
CH +
CH –
RETURN
Signal Quality
2Press [3, 4] to select the channel to move and
press the “Green” button.
3Press [3, 4] to select the new position of the
channel and press the “Green” button.
≥Repeat the steps 2 – 3 to move other channels.
4Press [ENTER] to save the group.
Below 2 (display red): The signal quality is so poor that there may
be interference in the pictures and sound.
2–5 (display orange): The signal quality is basically adequate, but
brief interference in the pictures and sound
is possible in isolated case.
Over 5 (display green): Optimum picture and sound quality.
Signal Strength
∫ To delete channels on a group
After performing steps 1–6
1Press [1].
The display for signal strength is grey. “0” means signal strength 0%,
“10” means signal strength 100%.
If the signal is too strong, the display will change from grey to red.
Reduce the signal amplification at your aerial.
When the signal is weak, check that the aerial is correctly positioned
and that all digital broadcasts for the current channel have not
finished for the evening.
2Press [3, 4] to select the channel and press the
“Yellow” button.
≥Repeat this step to delete other channels.
≥Press the “Blue” button to delete all the channels from the group.
3Press [ENTER] to save the group.
RQT8388
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
Deleting a channel from a group does not affect the channel itself.
You can still select the channel from the “All Services” group.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
Refer to the control reference on page 60.
Manual
Auto-Setup Restart
You can restart auto channel setting for terrestrial digital and
analogue channels if set up (➡ 18) fails for some reason.
However, if you perform “Auto-Setup Restart”, the order of analogue
channels will change.
You can delete analogue channels and set the analogue channel
details.
After performing steps 1–4 (➡ 65)
After performing steps 1–4 (➡ 65)
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Manual” and
press [ENTER].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Setup
Restart” and press [ENTER].
The confirmation screen appears.
Manual Tuning
Pos Name Ch
Pos Name Ch
1
2
ARD
ZDF
N3
10
2
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
3
28
4
5
press [ENTER].
6
7
8
9
SELECT
ENTER
HR3
BR3
7
9
You can also use the following method to restart Auto-Setup.
When the unit is on and stopped
RETURN
10
Delete
Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the
Auto-Setup screen appears.
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and
time settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording
programmes are also cancelled.
To delete a programme position
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press the
“Red” button.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫ To change the tuning settings for individual
programme position
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
Pos
Name
Channel
1
ARD
4
6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1]
Manual
Tuning
List of TV Reception Channels
Fine Tuning Auto
Mono
to select a
Off
programme position
and press [ENTER].
SELECT
Tuner
System
Channel
Coverage
VHF
0–12
6–12
UHF
CATV
RETURN
RETURN : leave
Australia
Analogue
45 MHz to
470 MHz
PAL–B
DVB–T
27–69
27–69
Press [3, 4] to select an item and press [1].
Australia
Digital
–
Pos
Programme position in the table
(You cannot change the programme position.)
Name
To enter or change the name of a TV station
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to enter station name and
press [ENTER].
If the station name needs a blank space, select
the blank between “Z” and “¢”.
Channel
To enter newly available TV stations or change
the channel number of an already tuned TV
station
Press [3, 4] or the numbered buttons to enter
the channel number of the desired TV station.
Wait a few moments until the desired TV station
has been tuned.
After the desired TV station is tuned, press
[ENTER].
Fine Tuning
Mono
To obtain the best tuning condition
Press [3, 4] to adjust the best tuning condition
and press [ENTER].
≥Press [1] to return to “Auto”.
To select the type of sound to be recorded
Press [3, 4] to select “On” if the stereo sound is
distorted due to inferior reception conditions, or if
you want to record the normal (mono) sound
during a stereo or bilingual broadcast, and press
[ENTER].
RQT8388
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV System
Clock Setting
Change the setting to match the equipment you are connecting with,
or to match the title when there are both PAL and NTSC titles on the
HDD.
This unit usually obtains time and date information from digital
broadcasts and automatically corrects the time several times a day.
However, if the time is not set correctly use the settings listed in the
method below.
In the case of a power failure, the clock setting remains in memory
for approximately 60 minutes.
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
tings
e
1
While stopped
s
s
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
Press [FUNCTIONS].
and press [ENTER].
unit’
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
press [ENTER].
and press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Connection”
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
ingthe
n
and press [1].
press [ENTER].
Cha
5 Press [3, 4] to select “TV System”
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
and press [ENTER].
press [1].
6 Press [3, 4] to select the TV system
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Clock” and
and press [ENTER].
press [ENTER].
TV System
Setup
Clock
e.g., This screen
appears while
receiving a
digital
PAL
NTSC
Automatic
Off
Time Zone
Queensland
Date
Tuning
Time
Disc
15
:
45
:
39
11
.
12
.
2006
Picture
Sound
Display
broadcast.
SELECT
Please set the clock.
ENTER: access RETURN: leave
CHANGE
Connection
Others
SELECT
ENTER
RETURN
ENTER
RETURN
≥PAL (factory preset)
–Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system
television. Titles recorded using NTSC are played as PAL
60.
–Select to record television programmes and PAL input from
other equipment.
–[HDD] Select when playing a PAL input title recorded on the
HDD.
≥NTSC
–Select when connecting to a NTSC television. Television
programmes cannot be recorded properly.
–Select to record NTSC input from other equipment.
–[HDD] Select when playing a NTSC input title recorded on
the HDD.
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” of
“Automatic” and press [ENTER].
7 Press [2, 1] to select the item you
want to change.
The items change as follows:
Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J
Reset the clock regularly to maintain accuracy.
(Monthly accuracy +/– 15 seconds.)
8 Press [3, 4] to change the setting.
7 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.
press [ENTER].
9 Press [ENTER] when you have
finished the settings.
10PThreecslosck [sRtarEts.TURN].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫ To change the setting all at once (PAL!#NTSC)
While stopped, keep pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the
main unit for 5 or more seconds.
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
[Note]
≥This unit cannot record to discs containing both PAL and NTSC
signals. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded
onto the HDD.)
∫ To change the time zone
1
Press [3, 4] to set “Automatic” to “On” and press [ENTER] in
step 6.
2
Press [3, 4] to select the correct time zone and press [ENTER].
Auto clock setting starts. This takes a few minutes.
“Automatic clock setting completed.” screen is displayed.
Press [RETURN] to exit the screen.
3
RQT8388
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Messages
On the television
Page
35
Authorization Error.
≥You are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a different
registration code. You cannot play the content on this unit. (DivX)
Cannot finish recording completely. ≥The programme was copy-protected.
—
—
22
≥The HDD or disc may be full.
≥The maximum number of times you can record the program is exceeded.
Cannot playback.
TV system is different from the
setting.
≥You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV
system currently selected on the unit.
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit.
67
To playback, please change the TV
System in Setup.
Cannot record on the disc.
Unable to format.
≥The disc may be dirty or scratched.
10
Cannot play on this unit.
≥You tried to play a non-compatible image.
≥Turn the unit off and re-insert the card.
33
13
Cannot output Audio with HDMI
because of copyright protection.
≥Should you connect equipment that does not support CPPM the audio from the CPPM
copy protected DVD-Audio cannot be output from HDMI AV OUT terminal. Connect the
audio cables (red, white) or optical digital cable to the corresponding terminals.
14–16
Cannot record. Disc is full.
≥[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] Create space by deleting any unnecessary titles.
[Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL there is
no increase in disc space. Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW
increases only when the last recorded title is deleted.]
41, 46,
56
Cannot record. Maximum number of
titles exceeded.
≥Use a new disc.
—
—
No Disc
≥The disc may be upside down.
No folders.
≥There is no compatible folder in this unit.
7, 33
13
No SD CARD
No valid SD card.
≥The card is not inserted. If this message is displayed with a compatible card already
inserted, turn off the unit, remove and then re-insert the card.
≥The card inserted is not compatible or the card format does not match.
7
Not enough space in the copy
destination.
≥Create space by deleting any unnecessary items.
41, 45,
46, 56
≥Delete one or more items registered on the copy list to ensure that the “Destination
Capacity” is not exceeded.
50, 53
4–5
This is a non-recordable disc.
≥The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert a DVD-RAM or unfinalized DVD-
R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R or +RW.
This disc is not formatted properly.
Format it using DVD Management in
FUNCTIONS menu.
≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW.
≥You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit. Record to the
HDD and then copy to the disc.
56
—
Not enough space on HDD. Space
of 4 hours (in SP mode) is
necessary.
≥
[-R]DL] [+R]DL] It is not possible to copy when there is not enough free space on the HDD
or when the total number of the recorded titles on the HDD and the titles to be copied are
greater than 500.
46
Delete unwanted titles from the HDD.
Maximum number of titles is
recorded on HDD. Please delete
unnecessary titles.
Rental Expired.
≥The DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays. You cannot play it. (DivX)
35
—
≥The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.
$
RQT8388
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On the unit’s display
The following messages or service numbers appear on the unit’s display when something unusual is detected during startup and use.
Page
20
DVD
≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control.
(“∑” stands for a
number.)
Press and hold [ENTER] and the indicated number button at the same time for more
than 2 seconds.
s
e
HARD ERR§
No AUDIO§
≥If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
—
sag
≥When connecting to CPPM incompatible equipment with an HDMI cable, CPPM copy protected DVD-
Audio cannot output audio through the HDMI AV OUT terminal. Connect the audio cables (red, white) or
optical digital cable to the corresponding terminals.
14–16
Me
NoERAS
NoREAD
≥You cannot delete items on this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
—
≥The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit.
≥This message may appear when the DVD lens cleaner has finished cleaning.
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc.
10
10
NoWRIT
≥You cannot write to this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
—
—
PLEASE WAIT§
≥There was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is carrying out
its recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not broken. Wait until
the message disappears.
PROG FULL§
SLEEP
≥There are already 32 timer programmes. Delete unnecessary timer programmes.
29
9
≥In order to extend HDD life, the HDD is in SLEEP mode.
SP 35:50
LP 151h
“SP”,”LP” and the
numbers are examples.
≥Available space on the HDD or disc.
The example “SP 35:50” is displayed when less than 100 hours are available and the example “LP 151h” is
displayed when over 100 hours are available.
—
“SP” and “LP” are recording modes, “35:50” means “35 hours 50 minutes” and “151h” means “151 hours”.
SW-DL
≥The unit is performing a software update.
64
56
UNFORMAT§
≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL or DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format) that has been recorded on other equipment.
Format the disc to use it.
However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted.
UNSUPPORT§
F74
≥You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on.
4–6
—
≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to a transfer malfunction.
Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
F75
U59
≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to an internal data malfunction.
—
—
Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
≥The unit is hot.
The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message disappears.
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear of
the unit.
U61
U71
≥(When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred during recording, playback or
copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not
broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again.
—
≥The connected equipment is not HDMI compatible.
—
—
U72
U73
≥The HDMI connection acts unusually.
–The connected equipment is not HDMI compatible.
–Please use HDMI cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
–The HDMI cable is damaged.
U88
≥(When a disc is inserted) Displays when there was something unusual detected with the disc while
recording, playback or copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal
operation; it is not broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again.
71
U99
≥The unit fails to operate properly. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby. Now press
[Í/I] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.
—
—
H or F
≥There is something unusual. (The service number displayed after H and F depends on the unit’s condition.)
≥Check the unit using the troubleshooting guide. If the service number does not disappear, do the following. 71–75
1. Disconnect the plug from the household mains socket, wait a few seconds, then reconnect it.
2. Press [Í/I] to turn the power on. (The unit may be fixed.)
If the service number does not disappear despite after doing the above, request service from the dealer.
Inform the dealer of the service number when requesting service
.
X HOLD
≥The Child Lock function is activated.
59
Press and hold [ENTER] and [RETURN] simultaneously until “X HOLD” disappears.
§The message are alternately displayed.
RQT8388
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frequently asked questions
Refer to the following items if you have any doubts about unit operations.
Set up
Page
—
Which aerial is suitable for receiving
digital terrestrial broadcasts?
≥You can use your current aerial. However, depending on the area where you live, a new
aerial may be necessary. Consult your local TV aerial installer. For more information
Can this unit receive or record High
Definition (HD) broadcasts?
≥No, this unit cannot receive or record High Definition (HD) broadcasts.
—
What equipment is necessary to play
multi channel surround sound?
≥You cannot playback multi-channel sound on this unit without other equipment. You must 16, 17
connect this unit with an HDMI cable or an optical digital cable to an amplifier with a
built-in (Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG) decoder.
≥An amplifier supporting CPPM and the HDMI standard (version 1.1 or later) must be
connected to this unit to play multi-channel audio on a DVD-Audio.
17
16
16
Are the headphones and speakers
directly connected to the unit?
≥You cannot directly connect them to the unit. Connect through the amplifier etc.
The television has both S VIDEO IN
terminal and COMPONENT VIDEO IN
terminals. Which terminal should I
connect with?
≥Connecting with the component video out terminal provides a more vivid picture
compared to connecting with the S Video out terminal.
If you have an LCD/plasma television or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan,
connect through the component video terminals for high-quality progressive video.
If you have a CRT television or a multi system television using PAL mode that is
compatible with progressive scan, we cannot recommend progressive output as some
flickering can occur.
Is my television progressive output
compatible?
≥All Panasonic televisions that have 625 (576)/50i · 50p, 525 (480)/60i · 60p input terminals
are compatible. Consult the manufacturer if you have another brand of television.
—
Disc
Can I play DVD-Video, DVD-Audio and
Video CDs bought in another country?
≥You cannot play DVD-Video if their region numbers are not supported by this unit.
Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information.
Cover
—
Can a DVD-Video that does not have a
region number be played?
≥The DVD-Video region number indicates the disc conforms to a standard. You cannot play
discs that do not have a region number. You also cannot play discs that do not conform to
a standard.
Please tell me about disc compatibility
with this unit.
≥This unit records and plays DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +RW, and
plays DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format). However you cannot directly record to a
DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit (playback and copy are possible).
≥This unit also records and plays high speed recording compatible DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW, +R, +R DL, +RW discs.
4–6
—
Please tell me about CD-R and CD-RW ≥This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been recorded in one of the following
6, 33
—
compatibility with this unit.
standards: CD-DA, Video CD, DivX, MP3 and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF).
≥You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with this unit.
Recording
Can I record from a commercially
purchased video cassette or DVD?
≥Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVD are copy protected; therefore, recording
is usually not possible.
—
—
Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD- ≥You can play on compatible equipment such as DVD players after finalizing the disc on
Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW
recorded on this unit be played on other
equipment?
this unit. However, depending on the condition of the recording, the quality of the disc and
capabilities of the DVD player, play may not be possible.
≥If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible equipment.
—
—
Can I record digital audio signals using
this unit?
≥You cannot record digital signals. The digital audio terminals on this unit are for output
only. (The audio recorded using the unit’s DV input terminal from a digital video
camcorder, for example, is recorded digitally.)
Can a digital audio signal from this unit
be recorded to other equipment?
≥You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording DVD, change the “Digital Audio
Output” settings to the following in the Setup menu.
–PCM Down Conversion: On
62
–Dolby Digital/DTS/MPEG: PCM
However, only as long as digital recording from the disc is permitted and the recording
equipment is compatible with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz.
≥You cannot record MP3 signals.
—
Can I switch to bilingual broadcast
during recording?
≥With HDD and DVD-RAM, you can. Just press [AUDIO].
≥With DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +RW you cannot. Change before
recording with “Bilingual Audio Selection” in the Setup menu.
32
62
Can I high speed copy to a disc?
≥Yes, you can.
47
Depending on the disc type, the maximum speed varies.
RQT8388
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart
do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.
The following do not indicate a problem with this unit:
≥Regular disc rotating sounds.
≥Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions.
≥Image disturbance during search.
≥Operations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again using a
Panasonic disc.)
≥The unit freezes due to one of its safety devices being activated.
(Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds.)
≥When the HDD has been automatically placed in the SLEEP mode
(➡ 9), or the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected
sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
≥Interruptions in reception due to periodic terrestrial broadcasting breaks.
≥A sound is heard when the HDD goes into SLEEP mode, or
operations are slow to respond in SLEEP mode.
Power
Page
No power.
≥Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active household mains socket.
14, 15
The unit does not turn on
pressing [Í DVD].
hotnguide
s
The unit switches to standby
mode.
≥One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to turn the unit on.
—
le
oub
r
Displays
/T
The display is dim.
“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s
display.
≥Change “FL Display” in the Setup menu.
≥Set the clock.
62
67
s
n
o
i
t
s
The time recorded on the disc
≥Times shown may disagree with actual times.
—
—
and the available time shown do ≥Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW increases only when the
que
not add up.
last recorded title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted.
≥Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL, there is no
increase in disc space.
≥More disc space than the actual recording time is used after recording or editing the DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL 200 times or more.
≥While searching, the elapsed time may not display correctly.
d
e
k
s
The play time shown for MP3
does not agree with the actual
time.
—
—
a
y
—
—
ntl
Compared to the actual recorded ≥The displayed recording/play time is converted from the number of frames at 29.97 frames
time, the elapsed time displayed
is less.
(Only when recording in NTSC)
(equal to 0.999 seconds) to one second. There will be a slight difference between the time
displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual one-hour elapsed time may display as
approximately 59 minutes 56 seconds). This does not affect the recording.
que
e
Fr
“U88” is displayed and the disc
cannot be ejected.
≥The unit is carrying out the recovery process. Do the following to eject the disc.
—
—
1
Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for about 10
seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.
While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CH W] on the main unit at the same time for
about 5 seconds. Remove the disc.
2
TV screen and video
Television reception worsens
after connecting the unit.
≥This can occur because the signals are being divided between the unit and other equipment.
It can be solved by using a signal booster, available from audio-visual suppliers. If it is not
solved by using a signal booster, consult the dealer.
The digital channel information
does not appear.
≥
Select the length of time (3-10 sec.) the “On-Screen Messages” in the Setup menu are to be displayed.
62
—
—
≥The digital channel information cannot be selected during playback or recording.
≥The digital channel information is not supported for analogue broadcasts.
The grey background does not
appear.
Picture does not appear during
timer recording.
The 4:3 aspect ratio picture
expands left and right.
≥Set “Grey Background” in the Setup menu to “On” while receiving analogue broadcasts. This
62
—
38
is not compatible when receiving a digital broadcast or during HDMI output.
≥Timer recordings work regardless whether the unit is on or off. To confirm the timer recording
is going to work properly, turn the unit on.
≥Use the television to change the aspect. If your television does not have that function, set
“Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”.
≥Check the settings for “TV Aspect” in the Setup menu.
≥If you connect an HDMI cable, set “Aspect for 4:3 Video” to “16:9” in the Setup menu.
63
63
Screen size is wrong.
The recorded title is stretched
vertically.
≥16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the following cases.
–If you recorded to the HDD or a DVD-RAM and “Rec for High Speed Copy” was set to “On”
in the Setup menu.
61
–If you recorded or copied to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R,
+R DL or +RW.
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television’s operating
instructions.
There is a lot of after-image
when playing video.
When playing DVD-Video using
progressive output, one part of
the picture momentarily appears
to be doubled up.
≥Set “Playback NR” in the Picture menu to “Off”.
38
38
≥Set “Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”. This problem is caused by the editing method
or material used on DVD-Video, but should be corrected if you use interlace output.
There is no apparent change in
picture quality when adjusted
with the Picture menu in the on-
screen menus.
≥The effect is less perceivable with some types of video.
—
The images from this unit do not ≥Make sure that the television is connected to the VIDEO OUT terminal, S VIDEO OUT
14–17
appear on the television.
terminal, COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals or HDMI AV OUT terminal on this unit.
≥Make sure that the television’s input setting (e.g., AV 1) is correct.
—
—
Picture is distorted.
≥Progressive output is set to on but the connected television is not progressive compatible.
Press and hold [∫] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit at the same time for more than 5
seconds to cancel this setting. The setting will change to interlace.
≥The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system used by the disc now playing. While
stopped, keep pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5 or more seconds.
The system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa.
67
≥
When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc that matches with this unit’s TV system.
—
—
RQT8388
≥Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide
Sound
Page
No sound.
Low volume.
≥Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings. Check the input mode on the
amplifier if you have connected one.
14–17,
62
Distorted sound.
Cannot hear the desired audio
type.
≥Press [AUDIO] to select the audio.
≥Turn off V.S.S. in the following cases.
–When using discs that do not have surround sound effects such as Karaoke discs.
–When playing bilingual broadcast programmes.
32
39
≥[DVD-A] The disc may have a restriction on the method of audio output.
This unit cannot playback multi-channel discs that prevent down-mixing unless the unit is
connected with an HDMI cable to an amplifier supporting CPPM and the HDMI standard
(version 1.1 or later). Refer to the disc jacket for more information.
≥Audio may not be output due to how files were created. (DivX)
≥Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
≥The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is output from the HDMI AV OUT
terminal or the OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.
≥To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable, set “Digital Audio Output” to
“HDMI and Optical” in the Setup menu.
≥Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be distorted if this unit is connected
with an HDMI cable.
≥If recording to the HDD or a DVD-RAM when “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, you
can only record either the main or secondary audio of a bilingual broadcast.
If you do not intend to copy the title to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL or +RW set “Rec for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu to “Off”.
—
—
—
—
63
—
24
Cannot switch audio.
≥You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.
–When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the
disc tray while DVD drive is selected.
—
–When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM”.
–When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”.
≥When recording a digital broadcast with multiple audio channels, this will record only the
audio channel selected in “DVB Multi Audio” in the on-screen menus. The audio channel
cannot be switched during playback.
62
24
39
≥The amplifier is connected using an optical digital cable or an HDMI cable. You cannot switch
the audio if “Dolby Digital” is set to “Bitstream”. Set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” or connect using
audio cables.
16, 17,
62
≥There are discs for which audio cannot be changed because of how the disc was created.
—
Operation
Cannot operate the television.
The remote control doesn’t work.
≥Change the manufacturer code. Some televisions cannot be operated even if you change the
code.
≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote
20
20
control.
Press and hold [ENTER] and the indicated number button at the same
time for more than 2 seconds.
11
—
≥The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones.
≥You are not pointing the remote control at the main unit’s remote control signal sensor during
operation.
≥Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission.
≥Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that may be subject to sunlight
exposure.
—
—
20
20
59
≥It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again after changing the batteries.
≥It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after changing the batteries.
≥The child lock function is activated.
The unit is on but cannot be
operated.
≥Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected properly.
≥Some operations may be prohibited by the disc.
≥The unit is hot (“U59” appears on the display). Wait for “U59” to disappear.
≥One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.
Reset the unit as follows:
22, 30
—
—
—
1
Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for about 10
seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.
Alternatively, disconnect the AC mains lead, wait one minute, then reconnect it.
Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch it on. If the unit still cannot be operated, consult the
dealer.
2
≥The unit cannot be operated while performing an update. (“SW-DL” appears on the unit’s
64
display.) Please wait until the update finishes.
HDD activation is slow.
Cannot eject disc.
≥The HDD is in SLEEP mode. (“SLEEP” appears in the unit’s display.)
9
≥The unit is recording.
—
≥The unit may have a problem. While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CH W] on the
main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove the disc and consult the dealer.
If the Child Lock function is activated, above operation does not work. Cancel the Child Lock
function.
59
RQT8388
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation (Continued)
Cannot tune channels.
Startup is slow.
Page
≥Check the connections.
14, 15
≥Make sure that “Quick Start” is set to “On”.
≥Startup takes time in the following situations:
–A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.
64
—
–The clock is not set.
–Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is connected.
–For a few minutes after 5:15 am due to system maintenance of this unit.
–When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
Takes time to read DVD-RAM.
≥It may take time to read a disc if it is being used for the first time in this unit or it has not been
used for a long time.
—
Recording, timer recording and copying
Cannot record.
Cannot copy.
≥You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be recorded on. Insert a disc the
unit can record onto.
4, 5
hotnguide
s
≥The disc is unformatted. Format the disc. [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to PROTECT, or the disc is protected with DVD
Management.
≥Some programmes have limitations on the number of times they can be recorded (CPRM).
≥You cannot record when there is not enough space or when the number of titles has reached
its limit. Delete unwanted titles or use a new disc.
56
55
le
oub
r
T
76
41, 46,
56
≥You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
—
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] In the following situations, you cannot copy. Delete unnecessary titles from the
41, 46,
56
HDD and then copy.
–If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will copy titles from the HDD to a
blank disc and fill the entire disc, HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode
recording is necessary).
–If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be copied has exceeded 500.
≥You cannot record and copy on finalized discs. However, you can record and copy again if
you format DVD-RW.
—
—
≥Due to peculiarities of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and
+RW you may be unable to record onto them if you either insert and remove the disc or
switch the unit on and off while a disc is loaded, a total of fifty times.
≥DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW recorded on this unit
may not be recordable on other Panasonic DVD Recorders.
≥This unit cannot record to discs containing both PAL and NTSC signals. (However, both types
of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.) Play of discs recorded with both PAL and
NTSC on another unit is not guaranteed.
—
—
Digital broadcasts cannot be
recorded or copied.
≥Some digital broadcasts are copyright protected with a “One time only recording” security
feature. This type of programme can only be recorded or copied to the HDD or a CPRM
compatible DVD-RAM.
—
Cannot record from external
equipment.
≥Check that the connection is correct.
≥Select the input channel for the equipment you have connected.
15, 54
—
Timer recording does not work
properly.
≥The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme times overlap. Correct the
programme.
≥The programme is not in timer recording standby. (The timer icon “F” in the timer recording
list is not on.)
29
28
G-CODE programming does not
work properly.
1
2
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press the “Red” button.
≥Set the clock.
67
28
Timer recording does not stop
≥Make sure that the recording drive is selected. Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
recording drive.
even when [∫] is pressed.
≥If you start recording immediately after turning on the unit while “Quick Start” is set to “On”,
you cannot then stop recording for a few seconds.
—
The timer programme remains
even after recording finishes.
≥The timer programme remains if set to daily or weekly.
27
A part or whole of a recorded
title has been lost.
≥If there is a power failure or the plug is disconnected from the household mains socket while
recording or editing, the title may be lost or the HDD/disc may become unusable.
You will have to format the disc ([HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or use a new disc. We cannot offer
any guarantee regarding lost programmes or discs.
—
56
Cannot copy to a DVD-R, etc.
≥When recording to the HDD, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” in the Setup menu.
24
—
disc using the high speed mode. ≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in EP or FR (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode, you cannot
perform high-speed copy.
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded on other Panasonic DVD recorders with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “On”, and then copied to the HDD on this unit may not copy to +R, +R DL
or +RW discs with high-speed copy.
—
When copying, it takes a long
time even when high speed
mode is selected.
≥
Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if the disc is high speed
recording compatible, the maximum speed may not be possible due to the condition of the disc.
—
≥It takes longer than normal to copy many titles.
≥You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6 hours when using other Panasonic
DVD Recorders that are not compatible with EP (8 Hours) mode recording.
—
—
An unusually loud sound is
coming from the rotating DVD-R,
etc.
≥When recording or high speed copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL and +RW the sound of the disc rotating may be louder than normal,
however, this is not a problem.
—
The DV automatic recording
function does not work.
≥If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted, check the connections and DV
equipment settings.
≥You cannot start recording until the images from the DV equipment appear on the television.
≥Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes on the tape in the DV
equipment are not successive.
54
—
—
RQT8388
≥Depending on the equipment, the DV automatic recording may not operate properly.
≥The audio/video recordings are recorded on other than a DV tape.
—
54
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide
Play
Page
Play fails to start even when
[1] (PLAY) is pressed.
Play starts but then stops
immediately.
≥Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up.
≥The disc is dirty.
≥You tried to play a blank disc or disc unplayable on this unit.
≥You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalized on the equipment used for recording.
≥You may be able to copy a “One time only recording” title that was recorded to DVD-RAM
using a different Panasonic DVD Recorder to this unit’s HDD, but play is not possible due to
copyright protection.
30
10
4–6
—
—
≥When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP (8 Hours)” mode, play may not be possible on DVD
players that are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this case use “EP (6 Hours)” mode.
≥You cannot play discs during DV automatic recording.
61
—
35
≥If playing DivX VOD content, refer to the homepage where you purchased it. (DivX)
Audio and video momentarily
pause.
≥This occurs between playlist chapters.
—
—
≥This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles on finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW that have been copied using the high
speed mode.
≥This occurs as scenes change during Quick View.
—
5
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches
between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme. However, video
and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers.
DVD-Video is not played.
≥You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Change this setting.
61
Alternative soundtrack and
subtitles cannot be selected.
≥The languages are not recorded on the disc.
≥You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the soundtrack and subtitles on
some discs. Use the disc’s menus to make changes.
—
31
No subtitles.
≥Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.
≥Turn the subtitles on. Set “Subtitle” on the on-screen menu to “On”.
—
38
Angle cannot be changed.
≥Angles can only be changed during scenes where different angles are recorded.
—
—
You have forgotten your ratings
password.
You want to cancel the ratings
level.
≥The ratings level returns to the factory preset. While the disc tray is open, press
[DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on
the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds (“INIT” will appear on the unit’s display).
Quick View does not work.
≥This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital.
≥This does not work when recording is in XP or FR mode.
—
—
The resume play function does
not work.
≥Memorized positions are cancelled when
–press [∫] several times.
–open the disc tray (excluding [HDD]).
–[DVD-A] [CD] [VCD] [SD] turn off the power.
–if a recording or timer recording was executed.
—
The Video CD picture does not
display properly.
≥When connecting to Multi-system TV, select “NTSC” in “TV System” in the Setup menu.
≥When connecting to PAL TV, the lower part of the picture cannot be displayed correctly during
search.
67
—
Time Slip does not work.
≥Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System” settings are different from the title
recorded on the disc.
67
It takes time before play starts.
Picture stops.
≥This is normal on DivX video. (DivX)
—
—
≥Picture may stop if the DivX files are greater than 2 GB. (DivX)
Edit
Available disc space does not
increase even after deleting a
title.
≥Available disc space does not increase after deleting on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL.
≥Disc space increases only when the last recorded title is deleted on DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format) and +RW. The disc space does not increase when any other titles are deleted.
46
—
Cannot edit.
≥You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available space.
Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space.
46
Cannot format.
≥The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
≥You tried formatting a disc that you may not be able to use in this unit.
10
4–6
Cannot create chapters.
≥The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when you turn it off or remove the
disc. The information is not written if there is an interruption to the power before this.
≥These operations are not possible with still pictures.
≥You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You cannot set an end point before a
start point.
—
Cannot mark the start point or
the end point during “Partial
Delete” operation.
—
—
Cannot delete chapters.
Cannot create a playlist.
≥When the chapter is too short to delete, use “Combine Chapters” to make the chapter longer.
41
—
≥You cannot select all the chapters at once in a title if the title also includes still pictures. Select
them individually.
Still pictures
Cannot display Direct Navigator
screen.
≥This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy.
—
Cannot edit or format a card.
≥Release the card’s protection setting. (With some cards, the “Write Protection Off” message
sometimes appears on the screen even when protection has been set.)
55
The contents of the card cannot
be read.
≥The card format is not compatible with the unit. (The contents on the card may be damaged.)
Format using FAT 12 or FAT 16 with other equipment or format the card with this unit.
≥The card contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that are not compatible with this
unit.
7, 33
56
7
≥Turn off and then turn on the unit again.
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB.
—
—
RQT8388
Copying, deleting and setting
protection takes a long time.
≥When there are a lot of folders and files, it may sometimes take a few hours.
≥When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take a long time. Format the disc or
card.
—
56
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To reset this unit
Page
64
To return all the settings other
than the main ones to the factory
preset
≥Select “Yes” in “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu. All the settings except for the ratings
level, ratings password and time settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording
programmes are also cancelled.
≥Select “Yes” in “Default Settings” in the Setup menu. All the settings other than the
programmed channels, time settings, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings password,
remote control code, return to the factory presets.
≥Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the DVB Auto-Setup screen
appears. All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and time settings return
to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.
64
—
To reset the ratings level
settings
≥While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then press and
hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.
—
—
To restore the unit if it freezes
due to one of the safety devices
being activated
≥Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds. (The settings remain.)
hotnguide
s
le
Digital broadcast
oub
r
T
Digital broadcasts cannot be
received.
≥Digital broadcast may not have started in your region yet.
—
—
≥The aerial may not be pointing in the direction of the TV station, or the direction of the aerial
may have changed due to strong winds or vibration. If problem persists consult your local TV
After DVB Auto-Setup only some ≥Check to ensure your area is covered by DVB transmissions.
—
or no DVB channels are found.
≥Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for DVB.
—
However, use the included RF coaxial cable shown in STEP 1, Connections “A” or “B”.
For your safety, the aerial and cable should be inspected/installed by a licenced installer that
should comply with Australian Standard AS1417.1.
14, 15
If you live within 5-10 km of DVB transmission towers, a combined VHF/UHF aerial should be
adequate. Outside this area, separate VHF and UHF aerials provide superior reception
performance.
≥If you live in a unit or apartment, check to ensure the Master Antenna TV (MATV) system is
designed for analogue and DVB-T reception. Please consult your body corporate. For more
—
Picture regularly breaks up on
some channels, “No Signal”
message is displayed.
≥Check “Signal Condition”. If “Signal Quality” or “Signal Strength” are displayed in red or
constantly changing, check aerial. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.
≥Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for DVB.
However, use the included RF coaxial cable shown in STEP 1, Connections “A” or “B”.
For your safety, the aerial and cable should be inspected/installed by a licenced installer that
should comply with Australian Standard AS1417.1.
65
—
14, 15
≥Interference (known as impulse noise) from household appliances such as light switches,
fridges etc may cause picture break up and/or audio distortion. Use a high quality quad
shielded coaxial cable fly lead between this unit and antenna wall socket to minimise impulse
noise pickup. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.
—
≥When “No Signal” message is displayed, check aerial connection.
—
—
Picture very infrequently breaks ≥Electrical atmospheric interference caused by local or distant lighting storms or heavy rain
up on some or all channels.
with wind in “leafy” locations may cause pictures to break up and audio to mute or distort
momentarily.
≥Impulse noise interference from an infrequently used electrical appliance, or a passing
vehicle or lawn mower with a “noisy” ignition system.
—
HDAVI Control
HDAVI Control does not work.
≥Set “Control with HDMI” in the Setup menu to “On”.
63
—
—
≥Check the HDAVI Control settings on the connected equipment.
≥If you changed the connections on the HDMI equipment, unplugged the unit, performed
updates or if there was a power failure, HDAVI control may not work. In this case, perform the
following.
1
2
3
Turn all equipment connected with an HDMI cable to “ON”, and then turn the TV (VIERA)
on.
Change the “HDAVI Control” to “No” on the TV (VIERA), then set to “Yes” again. (For more
information please see the VIERA operating instructions.)
Switch the VIERA input to the HDMI equipment connected to this unit, and after this unit’s
screen is displayed check the HDAVI control operations.
Other
After performing an update, you ≥Depending on the content of the update, some settings may have returned to the preset
—
can no longer receive
broadcasts.
values. Fix the settings again.
RQT8388
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Bitstream
Film and video
This is the digital form of multi-channel audio data (e.g., 5.1 channel)
before it is decoded into its various channels.
DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. This unit can
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable
method of progressive output.
Film: Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24 frames
per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs recorded at 30 frames
per second as well.)
Generally appropriate for motion picture films.
Video: Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second. (PAL discs) or
30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC discs). Generally
appropriate for TV drama programmes or animation.
CPPM (Content Protection for Prerecorded Media)
A copy protection system used for DVD-Audio files. This unit
supports CPPM.
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)
CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to
be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with
CPRM compatible recorders and discs.
Finalize
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, etc.
possible on equipment that can play such media. You can finalize
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL on this
unit.
Decoder
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This
is called decoding.
After finalizing, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer
record or edit. However, finalized DVD-RW can be formatted to
become recordable.
DivX
Folder
A video compression format developed by DivXNetworks, Inc. that
compresses video files without any considerable loss of video
quality.
This is a place on the hard disk or memory card where groups of
data are stored together. In the case of this unit, it refers to the place
where still pictures (JPEG, TIFF) and MPEG2 are stored.
Formatting
Dolby Digital
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM
recordable on recording equipment.
You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format),
+RW, SD Memory Cards and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on
this unit. Formatting deletes irrevocably all contents.
This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby
Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can
also be multi-channel audio. A large amount of audio information can
be recorded on one disc using this method.
When recording on this unit Dolby Digital (2 channel) is the default
audio.
Frames and fields
Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video you see
on your television. Each frame consists of two fields.
Down-mixing
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on
some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to
the 5.1-channel audio recorded on DVDs through your television’s
speakers. Some discs prohibit down-mixing and this unit can then
only output the front two channels.
u
r
Frame
Field
Field
≥A frame still shows two fields, so there may be some blurring, but
picture quality is generally better.
[DVD-A] Tracks that do not allow down-mixing will not play correctly
on this unit except when connecting with an HDMI cable to an
amplifier that meets HDMI standards (Ver. 1.1 or later) and is CPPM
compatible.
≥A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but
there is no blurring.
HDD (Hard disk drive)
This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk
with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and
a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading
and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format)
DPOF is the standard printing format for still picture data taken by a
digital camera, etc. It is used for automatic printing at a photo
developing store or on your home printer.
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface)
Drive
HDMI is a next-generation digital interface for consumer electronic
products. Unlike conventional connections, it transmits
uncompressed digital video and audio signals on a single cable. This
unit supports high-definition video output [720p (750p), 1080i
(1125i)] from HDMI AV OUT terminals. To enjoy high-definition video
a high definition compatible television is required.
In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD), disc
(DVD) and SD card (SD). These perform the reading and writing of
data.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good
separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are
possible.
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures.
If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc.,
the data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The
benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering
the degree of compression.
Dynamic range
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound
that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest
level of sound before distortion occurs.
Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the
loudest and softest sounds. This means you can listen at low
volumes but still hear dialogue clearly.
LPCM (Linear PCM)
These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on
CDs. LPCM sound is available when recording in XP mode.
RQT8388
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)
Thumbnail
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.
MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based
digital broadcasting. This unit records programmes using MPEG2.
MPEG2 moving picture files shot with a Panasonic SD multi-camera,
etc. can be copied to the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display
multiple pictures in the form of a list.
TIFF (Tag Image File Format)
This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures,
a common format for storing high quality images on digital cameras
and other devices.
y
r
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)
An audio compression method that compresses audio to
approximately one tenth of its size without any considerable loss of
audio quality. You can play MP3 you have recorded onto CD-R and
CD-RW.
sa
o
l
G
1080i
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines pass
every 1/50th of a second to display an interlaced image. Because
1080i (1125i) more than doubles current television broadcasts of
480i (525i), the detail is much clearer and creates a more realistic
and rich image.
Pan&Scan/Letterbox
In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they be
viewed on a widescreen television (16:9 aspect ratio), so images
often don’t fit regular (4:3 aspect ratio) televisions. Two styles of
picture, “Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.
Pan & Scan: The sides are cut off so the picture fills
the screen.
720p
In one high definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same
time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image. Since
progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there
is a minimal amount of screen flicker.
Letterbox: Black bands appear at the top and bottom
of the picture so the picture itself appears
in an aspect ratio of 16:9.
Playback control (PBC)
If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and
information with menus.
(This unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)
Progressive/Interlace
The PAL video signal standard has 625 (or 576) interlaced (i) scan
lines, whereas progressive scanning, called 625p (or 576p), uses
twice the number of scan lines. For the NTSC standard, these are
called 525i (or 480i) and 525p (or 480p) respectively.
Using progressive output, you can enjoy the high-resolution video
recorded on media such as DVD-Video.
Your television must be compatible to enjoy progressive video.
Panasonic televisions with 625 (576)/50i · 50p, 525 (480)/60i · 60p
input terminals are progressive compatible.
Protection
You can prevent accidental deletion by setting writing protection or
deletion protection.
RGB
This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G),
and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them.
By dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission,
noise is reduced for even higher quality images.
Sampling frequency
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave
(analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital
encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per
second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the
original sound.
Signal Quality
This is the guide for checking the aerial direction. The numbered
values displayed do not indicate the strength of the signal, but the
quality of the signal (the signal to noise ratio, or “S/N”). The channels
you can receive are affected by weather conditions, seasons, time
(day/night), region, length of the cable that is connected to the aerial,
etc.
RQT8388
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Recording system
DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format
Television system
Tuner system
DVD-R : DVD-Video format
Channel coverage
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format
DVD-RW : DVD-Video format
PAL-B
Australia
VHF: 0 to 12
UHF: 27 to 69
CATV: 45 MHz to 470 MHz
+R
+R DL (Double Layer)
+RW
DVB-T
Australia
VHF: 6 to 12
UHF: 27 to 69
Recordable discs
DVD-RAM:
Ver. 2.0
Ver. 2.1/3X-SPEED DVD-RAM Revision 1.0
Ver.2.2/5X-SPEED DVD-RAM Revision 2.0
for General Ver. 2.0
RF converter output:
Not provided
1 pc
SD card slot
DVD-R:
SD Memory Card slot:
Still picture (JPEG, TIFF)
Compatible media:
Format:
for General Ver. 2.0/4X-SPEED DVD-R Revision 1.0
for General Ver.2.x/8X-SPEED DVD-R Revision 3.0
SD Memory Card§, MultiMediaCard
FAT12, FAT16
for General Ver.2.x/16X-SPEED DVD-R Revision 6.0
for DL Ver.3.0
Image file format:
JPEG conforming DCF (Design rule for Camera File system),
(sub sampling; 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)
TIFF (Uncompressed RGB chunky), DPOF Compatible
Number of pixels:
Thawing time:
for DL Ver.3.x/4X-SPEED DVD-R for DL Revision 1.0
DVD-RW:
+R:
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.x/2X-SPEED DVD-RW Revision 1.0
Ver. 1.x/4X-SPEED DVD-RW Revision 2.0
Ver. 1.x/6X-SPEED DVD-RW Revision 3.0
34 a 34 to 6144 a 4096
Approx. 3 sec (6 M pixels, JPEG)
Ver. 1.0
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.2
SD Video (MPEG2)
Compatible media:
Ver. 1.3
SD Memory Card§, MultiMediaCard
for DL Ver.1.0
Ver. 1.1
Codec:
File Format:
MPEG 2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video Profile)
SD-Video format conforming
+RW:
Ver.1.2/4X-SPEED
Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from card
to HDD or DVD-RAM disc.
After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVD-
RAM disc, the playback is possible.
Recording time
Maximum 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc)
XP: Approx. 1 hour, SP: Approx. 2 hours
LP: Approx. 4 hours, EP: Approx. 6 hours/8 hours
[DMR-EX75]
Maximum Approx. 284 hours with 160 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)
DV input
IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 pin : 1 pc
19 pin type A: 1 pc
XP: Approx. 36 hours, SP: Approx. 70 hours
LP: Approx. 138 hours, EP: Approx. 212 hours/284 hours
HDMI Output
HDMI
[DMR-EX85]
HDMI Ver.1.2a (EDID Ver.1.3)
Maximum Approx. 443 hours with 250 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)
XP: Approx. 55 hours, SP: Approx. 111 hours
LP: Approx. 222 hours, EP: Approx. 333 hours/443 hours
Others
Region code:
Operating temperature:
Operating humidity range:
Power supply:
#4
5 oC to 40 oC
Playable discs
10 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)
AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz
[DMR-EX75] Approx. 34 W
[DMR-EX85] Approx. 35 W
430 mmk329 mmk58 mm
Approx. 4.3 kg
DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R : DVD-Video format, DivX
Power consumption:
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format
DVD-RW : DVD-Video format, DVD Video Recording format
+R, +R DL (Double Layer), +RW
DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD,
CD-R/CD-RW (CD-DA, Video CD, MP3, JPEG, DivX formatted discs)
Dimensions (WkDkH):
Mass:
Power consumption in standby mode:
Approx. 2 W (Power Save mode)
Internal HDD capacity
[DMR-EX75] 160 GB
[DMR-EX85] 250 GB
Optical pick-up
System with 1 lens, 2 integration units
[Note]
(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LASER specification
Class 1 LASER Product (Pickup)
§
Includes miniSD cards. (A miniSD adaptor needs to be inserted.)
Wave length: (CD) 780 nm wave length, (DVD) 662 nm wave length
Laser power:
≥Useable capacity will be less (SD Memory Card).
No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety protection
Audio
Recording system:
Dolby Digital 2ch, Linear PCM (XP mode)
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack)
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
More than 10 k≠
Audio in:
Input level:
Input impedance:
Audio out:
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack)
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Less than 1 k≠
Output level:
Output impedance:
Digital audio out: Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)
Video
Video system:
PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 fields
NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 fields
MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)
Recording system:
Video in (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
S-Video in (PAL/NTSC):
AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
Video out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
S-Video out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1 (21 pin), S-Video Out (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
RGB out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ≠, termination
Component video output (NTSC 480p/480i, PAL 576p/576i)
Y: 1.0 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
PB: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
PR: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
RQT8388
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety precautions
Placement
Foreign matter
Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight, high
temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These
conditions can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby
shortening the unit’s service life.
Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause electric
shock or malfunction.
Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock or
malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from the
power supply and contact your dealer.
Do not place heavy items on the unit.
Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain
flammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.
s
n
Voltage
o
i
t
u
a
Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the unit
and cause a fire.
Service
ec
r
Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when
setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.
Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself. If sound is
p
y
interrupted, indicators fail to light, smoke appears, or any other
problem that is not covered in these instructions occurs, disconnect
the AC mains lead and contact your dealer or an authorized service
centre. Electric shock or damage to the unit can occur if the unit is
repaired, disassembled or reconstructed by unqualified persons.
et
AC mains lead protection
af
S
/
Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not
damaged. Poor connection and lead damage can cause fire or
electric shock. Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.
Grasp the plug firmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC
mains lead can cause electric shock.
s
n
o
i
Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the power
source if it is not to be used for a long time.
at
c
i
f
i
ec
Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric
shock.
p
S
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Official DivX Certified™ product.
Plays DivX 5, DivX 4, DivX 3, and DivX VOD video content (in
compliance with DivX Certified™ technical requirements).
®
®
®
®
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of
DivXNetworks, Inc. and are used under license.
“DTS” and “DTS 2.0iDigital Out” are trademarks of Digital
Theater Systems, Inc.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized
by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited
consumer uses only unless otherwise authorized by
HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Matsushita Electric Industrial
Co., Ltd.
Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
-If you see this symbol-
≥SD logo is a trademark.
≥Portions of this product are protected under copyright law and
are provided under license by ARIS/SOLANA/4C.
≥miniSD Logo is a trademark.
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the
European Union
This symbol is only valid in the European Union.
If you wish to discard this product, please contact
your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct
method of disposal.
RQT8388
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Album
Edit Favourites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment– Finalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Quick View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Aspect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Audio
Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . 29
AV2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
AV-in NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Ratings level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Rec for High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . 24, 61
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Auto Renewal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26–29
Relief Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Remote control code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Resume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
RGB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 77
Finalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 57, 76
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 56, 76
FR (Flexible Recording Mode) . . . . . . 23
FUNCTIONS window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
G-CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
HDAVI Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
HDMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 63, 76
Important notes for recording . . . . . . . . 8
JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 76
Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Channel
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 40
Chasing playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Cleaning
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Clock settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Connection
Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 15
Amplifier, system component . . . . 16, 17
DV input terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
HDMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14–17
Video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Copy
SD card (MPEG2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Title/Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Copy (playlist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
CPPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
CPRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Create Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 41
Create playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Language
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 61
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 61
LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 76
SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 13
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Shipping Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Simultaneous rec and play . . . . . . . . . 25
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Still picture
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
System Update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Manual Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Menu
DivX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
On-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Mode
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 35
TIFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 77
Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Time Zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26–29
Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Tuning
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 66
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
TV System (PAL/NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Name
Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 41
Noise reduction (NR)
AV-in NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Playback NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
V.S.S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
On-screen
Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Delete
Digital channel information . . . . . . . . 21
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
All titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 43
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
DELETE Navigator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Dialog Enhancer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . 21
Direct Navigator . . . . . . . . . 30, 36, 40, 44
Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
DivX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33–35, 76
DPOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 76
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
DVB Multi Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
PCM Down Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Picture settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 61
Playback NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Power Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Progressive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 38, 77
Properties
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Protection
Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
p
RQT8388-L
F0906YK0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|